679689

ZyXEL VMG1312-B series Manual

316
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/331
Next page
Quick Start Guide
www.zyxel.com
VMG1312-B Series
Wireless N VDSL2 4-port Gateway with USB
Version 1.00
Edition 3, 10/2015
Copyright © 2015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
User’s Guide
Default Login Details
LAN IP Address http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin, zyuser
Password 1234, 1234
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
•Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and get up and running right away.
•More Information
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Device
.
Contents Overview
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
3
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................15
Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................17
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................23
Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................31
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................33
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................60
Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................62
Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................66
Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................94
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................125
Routing ..................................................................................................................................................141
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................148
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................165
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................182
IGMP/MLD ............................................................................................................................................186
Vlan Group ............................................................................................................................................189
Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................191
USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................196
Power Management ..............................................................................................................................203
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................207
MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................216
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................218
Scheduler Rule ......................................................................................................................................223
Certificates ............................................................................................................................................225
Log .......................................................................................................................................................232
Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................235
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................239
Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................241
IGMP/MLD Status ................................................................................................................................243
xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................245
3G Statistics .........................................................................................................................................249
User Account .........................................................................................................................................251
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................253
TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................255
TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................257
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................................258
Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................260
Contents Overview
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
4
E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................262
Log Setting ...........................................................................................................................................264
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................267
Configuration .........................................................................................................................................270
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................273
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................278
Appendices ......................................................................................................................................285
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide .........................................................................................15
Chapter 1
Introducing the Device.......................................................................................................................17
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................17
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................17
1.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................18
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................18
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support .............................................................................................................18
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................20
1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................21
1.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................21
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................22
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................23
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................23
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................23
2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................25
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................25
2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................26
2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................26
Chapter 3
Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31
3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................31
Chapter 4
Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................33
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................33
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection ..........................................................................................33
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................36
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
6
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................36
4.3.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................37
4.3.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................41
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ................................................................................................42
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................45
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ........................................................................................47
4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS .......................................................................................................51
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................51
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device ..........................................................................................52
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................52
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................52
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ....................................................................................53
4.10 Using the Print Server Feature ........................................................................................................54
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................60
Chapter 5
Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................62
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................62
5.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................62
5.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................63
Chapter 6
Broadband...........................................................................................................................................66
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................66
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................66
6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................67
6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................70
6.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................70
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................72
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................79
6.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................83
6.5 The 802.1x Screen ............................................................................................................................86
6.5.1 Modify 802.1X Settings ............................................................................................................87
6.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen ................................................................................................................87
6.7 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................88
Chapter 7
Wireless...............................................................................................................................................94
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................94
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................94
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
7
7.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................94
7.2 The General Screen .........................................................................................................................95
7.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................97
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................97
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................98
7.3 The Guest / More AP Screen ............................................................................................................99
7.3.1 Edit Guest / More AP ............................................................................................................100
7.4 MAC Authentication ........................................................................................................................102
7.5 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................................103
7.6 The WMM Screen ...........................................................................................................................105
7.7 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................106
7.7.1 WDS Scan .............................................................................................................................108
7.8 The Others Screen ..........................................................................................................................108
7.9 The Channel Status Screen ............................................................................................................ 110
7.10 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 111
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................. 111
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ................................................................................................... 113
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................. 113
7.10.4 Signal Problems .................................................................................................................. 115
7.10.5 BSS ..................................................................................................................................... 116
7.10.6 MBSSID ............................................................................................................................... 116
7.10.7 Preamble Type .................................................................................................................... 117
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ................................................................................... 117
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ............................................................................................... 117
Chapter 8
Home Networking .............................................................................................................................125
8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................125
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................125
8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................126
8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................127
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................127
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................131
8.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................132
8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example .............................................................................133
8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................135
8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen .............................................................................................................136
8.6.1 The Add/Edit STB Vendor ID Screen ....................................................................................136
8.7 The TFTP Server Name Screen .....................................................................................................137
8.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................138
8.8.1 LANs, WANs and the Device .................................................................................................138
8.8.2 DHCP Setup ..........................................................................................................................138
8.8.3 DNS Server Addresses .........................................................................................................138
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
8
8.8.4 LAN TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................139
Chapter 9
Routing ..............................................................................................................................................141
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................141
9.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................141
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................142
9.3 The DNS Route Screen ..................................................................................................................143
9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen .................................................................................................144
9.4 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................144
9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................146
9.5 RIP ..............................................................................................................................................146
9.5.1 The RIP Screen .....................................................................................................................147
Chapter 10
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................148
10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................148
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................148
10.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................148
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ........................................................................................150
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen .............................................................................................................151
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue .........................................................................................................152
10.5 The Class Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................153
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ............................................................................................................154
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .....................................................................................................158
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .......................................................................................................159
10.7 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................160
Chapter 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................165
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................165
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................165
11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................165
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................166
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ....................................................................................................168
11.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................169
11.3.1 Add New Application ............................................................................................................170
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................171
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................172
11.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................173
11.6 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................................174
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................175
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................176
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
9
11.8 The Sessions Screen ....................................................................................................................177
11.9 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................177
11.9.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................178
11.9.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................178
11.9.3 How NAT Works ...................................................................................................................179
11.9.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................179
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................182
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................182
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................182
12.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................182
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................183
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................183
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................184
Chapter 13
IGMP/MLD..........................................................................................................................................186
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................186
13.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................186
13.2 The IGMP/MLD Screen .................................................................................................................186
Chapter 14
Vlan Group ........................................................................................................................................189
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................189
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................189
14.2 The Vlan Group Screen ................................................................................................................189
14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group .......................................................................................................190
Chapter 15
Interface Group.................................................................................................................................191
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................191
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................191
15.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................191
15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................192
15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................194
Chapter 16
USB Service ......................................................................................................................................196
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................196
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................196
16.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................196
16.1.3 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................198
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
10
16.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................198
16.2.1 The Add New User Screen ..................................................................................................199
16.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................200
16.4 Print Server ..................................................................................................................................201
16.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................201
16.4.2 The Print Server Screen ......................................................................................................202
Chapter 17
Power Management..........................................................................................................................203
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................203
17.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................203
17.2 The Power Management Screen ..................................................................................................203
17.3 The Auto Switch Off Screen ..........................................................................................................204
17.3.1 The Auto Switch Off Add or Modify Screen .........................................................................205
17.3.2 The Add/Edit Rule Screen ...................................................................................................206
Chapter 18
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................207
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................207
18.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................208
18.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................208
18.3 The Protocol Screen ....................................................................................................................209
18.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................210
18.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................212
18.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................212
18.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................214
Chapter 19
MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................216
19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................216
19.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................216
Chapter 20
Parental Control................................................................................................................................218
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................218
20.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................218
20.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile ......................................................................................219
Chapter 21
Scheduler Rule..................................................................................................................................223
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................223
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
11
21.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ..........................................................................................................223
21.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................224
Chapter 22
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................225
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................225
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................225
22.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................225
22.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................225
22.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................226
22.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................228
22.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................228
22.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................229
22.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................230
Chapter 23
Log ....................................................................................................................................................232
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................232
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................232
23.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................232
23.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................233
23.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................234
Chapter 24
Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................235
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................235
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................235
24.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................235
24.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................236
24.4 The NAT Status Screen .................................................................................................................237
Chapter 25
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................239
25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................239
25.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................239
25.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................240
Chapter 26
Routing Table....................................................................................................................................241
26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................241
26.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................241
Chapter 27
IGMP/MLD Status .............................................................................................................................243
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
12
27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................243
27.2 The IGMP/MLD Group Status Screen ...........................................................................................243
Chapter 28
xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................245
28.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................245
Chapter 29
3G Statistics .....................................................................................................................................249
29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................249
29.2 The 3G Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................249
Chapter 30
User Account ....................................................................................................................................251
30.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................251
30.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................251
30.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen .....................................................................................252
Chapter 31
Remote Management........................................................................................................................253
31.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................253
31.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................253
Chapter 32
TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................255
32.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................255
32.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................255
Chapter 33
TR-064................................................................................................................................................257
33.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................257
33.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................257
Chapter 34
SNMP .................................................................................................................................................258
34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................258
34.2 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................258
Chapter 35
Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................260
35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................260
35.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................260
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
13
Chapter 36
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................262
36.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................262
36.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................262
36.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................263
Chapter 37
Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................264
37.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................264
37.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................264
37.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................265
Chapter 38
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................267
38.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................267
38.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................267
Chapter 39
Configuration ....................................................................................................................................270
39.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................270
39.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................270
39.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................272
Chapter 40
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................273
40.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................273
40.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................273
40.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................273
40.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................274
40.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................274
40.5 OAM Ping ......................................................................................................................................275
Chapter 41
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................278
41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................278
41.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................279
41.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................281
41.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................282
41.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................283
41.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................283
Table of Contents
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
14
Part III: Appendices.......................................................................................285
Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................287
Appendix B Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................293
Appendix C IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................306
Appendix D Services .......................................................................................................................314
Appendix E Legal Information..........................................................................................................318
Index ..................................................................................................................................................325
15
PART I
User’s Guide
16
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
17
CHAPTER 1
Introducing the Device
1.1 Overview
The VMG1312-B Series is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway. It has a DSL port
and a Gigabit Ethernet port for super-fast Internet access. The Device supports both Packet
Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL,
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available.
Only use firmware for your Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
The Device has two USB ports for sharing files via a USB storage device, sharing a USB printer, or
connecting a 3G dongle for a WAN backup connection.
• The VMG1312-B10A works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone
Service).
• The VMG1312-B30A works over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) or T-ISDN (UR-2).
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a
(supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device
Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
18
1.4 Applications for the Device
Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM
jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or
VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you
configure in the Device. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 70 for the Network Setting
> Broadband screen.
Computers can connect to the Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 Device’s Internet Access Application
You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on,
all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from
your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you
can safely browse the Internet and download files.
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support
The USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing, media server and printer-sharing.
ADSL / VDSL
WLAN
PPPoE
IPoE
Bridging
WAN
ADSL
IPoA
WAN
LAN
LAN
WLAN
A
A
PPPoA
IPoE
PPPoE
Bridging
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
19
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can
connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device.
Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application
Media Server
You can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music,
and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Device’s USB port (without having to copy them
to another computer).
Figure 3 USB Media Server Application
Printer Server
The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB
printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers
connected to your network.
B
A
B
A
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
20
Figure 4 Sharing a USB Printer
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 5 LEDs on the Device
None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
POWER Green On The Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking The Device is self-testing.
Red On The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device
malfunction.
Off The Device is not receiving power.
Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress.
ETHERNET
1-4
Green On The Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device
on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
21
1.6 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1 Make sure the PWR/SYS LED is on (not blinking).
2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the PWR/SYS LED begins to blink and then release it. When the PWR/SYS LED begins to
blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.7 Wireless Access
The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs
and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet
cables.
WLAN/WPS Green On The wireless network is activated.
Blinking The Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Orange Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off The wireless network is not activated.
DSL Green On The ADSL line is up.
Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line.
Orange On The VDSL line is up.
Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line.
Off The DSL line is down.
INTERNET Green On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the
DSL connection is up.
Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.
Red On The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible
causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE
authentication failed.
USB Green On The Device recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected
to it.
Off The Device does not detect a USB connection.
Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
22
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 6 Wireless Access Example
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button at the back of the Device for
one second. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking.
2 Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it.
3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WLAN/WPS
LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the Device for one to
five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
23
CHAPTER 2
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your
Device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1 Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
2 Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go
to http://192.168.1.1.
3 A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device,
type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If
advanced account security is enabled (see Section 30.2 on page 251) the number of dots that
appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password
field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your
password and click Login.
Figure 7 Password Screen
4 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly
recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and
click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the
password now.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
24
Figure 8 Change Password Screen
5 The Quick Start Wizard screen appears. You can configure basic Internet access, and wireless
settings. See Chapter 3 on page 31 for more information.
6 After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen, the Network Map page appears.
Figure 9 Network Map
7 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the Device’s interface and system
information.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
25
2.2 Web Configurator Layout
Figure 10 Screen Layout
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
The icons provide the following functions.
B
C
A
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Language: Select the language you prefer.
Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Device’s time zone
Internet access, and wireless settings.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
26
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
After you click Status on the Connection Status page, the Status screen is displayed. See
Chapter 5 on page 63 for more information about the Status screen.
If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the
connection status of the Device’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are
gray.
Figure 11 Virtual Device
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The
following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/
devices connected to it.
Network Setting
Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add
new WAN connections.
3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection.
Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex
J, and DSL PhyR functions.
802.1x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the
Device.
Ethernet WAN Use this screen to convert Ethernet LAN 4 port as WAN port, or
restore the WAN port to LAN port.
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
27
Wireless General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
Guest/More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device.
MAC
Authentication
Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices
of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device.
WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to
other access points.
Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the
results.
Home
Networking
LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
properties.
Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
Additional
Subnet
Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP
entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP
addresses.
TFTP Server
Name
Use DHCP option 66 to identify a TFTP server name.
Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device.
DNS Route Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names
through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s).
Policy
Forwarding
Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device.
RIP
Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to
exchange routing information with other routers.
QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers.
NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
Applications
Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device.
Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Device’s port triggering settings.
DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets
from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen.
ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device’s address mapping settings.
Sessions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions
each client host is allowed to have through the Device.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
28
DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
IGMP/MLD Use this screen to configure multicast settings (IGMP for IPv4 and
MLD for IPv6 multicast groups) on the WAN.
Vlan Group Vlan Group Use this screen to group and tag VLAN IDs to outgoing traffic from
the specified interface.
Interface
Group
Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
USB Service File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device.
Media Server Use this screen to use the Device as a media server.
Print Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the
model name of the associated printer.
Power
Management
Power
Management
This screen is only available for administrators. Use this screen to
manually turn on/off specific interface(s) and/or all LEDs
immediately.
Auto Switch Off This screen is only available for administrators. Use this screen to
configure schedules to have the Device automatically turn on/off
specific interface(s) and/or all LEDs.
Security
Firewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Protocol Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules.
Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS)
attacks.
MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC
addresses to the Device.
Parental
Control
Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Scheduler
Rules
Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured
restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA
Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
System Monitor
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
29
Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the
Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Security Log Use this screen to view all security related events. You can select
level and category of the security events in their proper drop-down
list window.
Levels include:
•Emergency
•Alert
•Critical
•Error
•Warning
•Notice
• Informational
• Debugging
Categories include:
•Firewall
•MAC Filter
• Forward Web Sites
•Blocked Web Sites
•Attack
• Certificate
•IPSec
• Account
Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the WAN port of the Device.
LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the LAN ports of the Device.
NAT Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts.
ARP table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC
address of each DHCP connection.
Routing Table Use this screen to view the routing table on the Device.
IGMP/MLD
Group Status
Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP/MLD settings on the
Device.
xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the VMG1312-B Series’s xDSL traffic
statistics.
3G Statistics Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status.
Maintenance
User Account User Account Use this screen to change user password on the Device.
Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
TR-069 Client Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto
Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-064 Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
SNMP Use this screen to configure SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) settings.
Time Use this screen to change your Device’s time and date.
Email
Notification
Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender
addresses on the Device.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
30
Log Setting Use this screen to change your Device’s log settings.
Firmware
Upgrade
Use this screen to upload firmware to your Device.
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your Device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off.
Diagnostic Ping&Traceroute
&Nslookup
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can
use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association),
perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with
the DSL connection.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK TAB FUNCTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
31
CHAPTER 3
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless
settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on Chapter 4 on page 33) for
background information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup
1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click Start icon in
the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Click Next.
Figure 12 Quick Start - Welcome
2 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary
depending on your current connection type. Click Next.
Chapter 3 Quick Start
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
32
Figure 13 Quick Start - Internet Connection
3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure
your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Save.
Figure 14 Quick Start - Wireless
4 Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
33
CHAPTER 4
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the Device’s various features.
• Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 33
• Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 36
• Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 42
• Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 45
• Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 47
• Access the Device Using DDNS, see page 51
• Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 52
• Access Your Shared Files From a Computer, see page 53
• Using the Print Server Feature, see page 54
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection
This tutorial shows you how to set up an ADSL Internet connection using the Web Configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) to configure the Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for any
information you need to configure the Broadband screens.
1 Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN
Interface.
2 In this example, the DSL connection has the following information.
General
Name MyDSLConnection
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
34
3 Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided
above.
Set the Type to ADSL over ATM.
Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service
provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select
PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type.
Set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only.
4 Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider.
5 Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway
check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as
192.168.5.2
(DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2).
6 Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings.
7 Click Apply to save your settings.
Type ADSL
Connection Mode Routing
Encapsulation PPPoE
IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI/VCI 36/48
Encapsulation Mode LLC/SNAP-Bridging
Service Category UBR without PCR
Account Information
PPP User Name 1234@DSL-Ex.com
PPP Password ABCDEF!
PPPoE Service Name MyDSL
Static IP Address 192.168.1.32
Others Authentication Method: AUTO
PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled
NAT: Enabled
IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled
Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled
VLAN: Disabled
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
35
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
36
8 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows.
Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to
contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens.
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the
wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Device. Then he can set up a wireless
network using WPS (Section 4.3.2 on page 37) or manual configuration (Section 4.3.3 on page 41).
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level and WPA2-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided
parameters (see page 36). Click Apply.
SSID Example
Security Mode WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n Mixed
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
37
2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field.
Click Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the Device (see Section 4.3.2 on page 37). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to search
for the Device (see Section 4.3.3 on page 41).
4.3.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the Device as the AP
and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
38
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the Device. A wireless
client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the
Device.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
1 Make sure that your Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless
signal.
2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
3 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
4 Push and hold the WPS button located on the Device’s front panel for more than 5 seconds.
Alternatively, you may log into Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting >
Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function for method 1 and click Apply. Then click the
Connect button.
Note: Your Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in
its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use
one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
39
The Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two
minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely.
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both Device and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the Device’s web configurator
and the wireless client’s utility.
1 Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
2 Log into Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen.
Enable the WPS function and click Apply.
Wireless Client
VMG
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
WLAN/
WPS
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
40
3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on
the wireless client utility screen within two minutes.
The Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the
wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate
with the Device securely.
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a Device and a
wireless client by using PIN method.
1
2
3
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
41
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
4.3.3 Without WPS
Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the “Example” SSID. Then
enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet
connection.
Note: The Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure
that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these
standards.
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Wireless Client
VMG
COMMUNICATION
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
42
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups
Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown
in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode.
• Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group.
• Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group.
• Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a different SSID and password.
Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups.
1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the
company’s general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters
and click Apply.
COMPANY VIP GUEST
SSID Company VIP Guest
Security Level More Secure More Secure More Secure
Security Mode WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly 123456789 guest123
Company
VIP
Guest
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
43
2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP to open the following screen. Click the
Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group.
3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
44
4 In the Guest/More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network
group.Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
45
5 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the Guest/More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the
SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access.
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another
Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the Device’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial
shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
46
In the following figure, router R is connected to the Device’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1
(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1
network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Device’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the
traffic to B.
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
The Device’s WAN 172.16.1.1
The Device’s LAN 192.168.1.1
IP Type IPv4
Use Interface VDSL/ppp1.1
A 192.168.1.34
N2
B
N1
A
R
N2
B
N1
A
R
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
47
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1 Log into the Device’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
2 Click Network Setting > Routing.
3 Click Add new Static Route in the Static Route screen.
4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R.
4b Set IP Type to IPv4.
4c Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
4d Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address)
in the Gateway IP Address field.
4e Select VDSL/ppp1.1 as the Use Interface.
4a Click OK.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
R’s N1 192.168.1.253
R’s N2 192.168.10.2
B 192.168.10.33
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
48
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic
because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also
upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your
colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of
10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest
priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN
interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for
example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Device.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS
mapping table on the Device.
QoS Example
1 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and select Enable. Set your WAN Managed Upstream
Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the Device automatically determine this
figure). Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2 Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check
Active and enter or select the following values:
• Name: E-mail
10,000 kbps
DSL
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
49
• Interface: WAN
• Priority: 1 (High)
• Weight: 8
• Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
3 Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the
settings as shown in the screen below.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
50
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example.
From
Interface
This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this
example.
Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address.
IP Address Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you
know it.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you
know it.
To Queue
Index
Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-
mail queue created in this example.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
51
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the
previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC
address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields).
4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. This shows
the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS
If you connect your Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient
for you to manage the device from the Internet. The Device’s WAN IP address changes dynamically.
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the Device using a domain name.
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial covers:
• Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
• Configuring DDNS on Your Device
• Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and
password.
3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
•Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
•Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your Device is currently using. You can find the IP
address on the Device’s Web Configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Device later.
w.x.y.z
a.b.c.d
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
A
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
52
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device
Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen.
•Select Enable Dynamic DNS.
•Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider.
•Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the Device from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the
Internet.
2 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3 The Device’s login page should appear. You can then log into the Device and manage it.
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter
Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and
downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she
can concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device. Thomas decides to
use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to
Josephine’s computer.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
53
1 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to
activate MAC filter function.
2 Select Allow. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas’ computer in this screen. Click
Apply.
Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends.
However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet
through the Device.
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer
Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the Device’s USB
port.
Thomas
Josephine
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
54
Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files.
1 In FileZilla enter the IP address of the Device (the default is 192.168.1.1), your account’s user
name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password
authentication appears.
File Sharing via Windows Explore r
2 Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder.
4.10 Using the Print Server Feature
The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB
printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then adding the printer on the computers
connected to your network.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
55
In this section you can:
• Add a New Printer Using Windows
• Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X
Add a New Printer Using Windows
This example shows how to connect a printer to your Device using the Windows 7 operating
system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system.
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers to open the Devices and Printers screen.
Click Add a printer.
Tutorial: Printers Folder
2 The Add Printer wizard screen displays. Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
56
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welc ome
3 Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welc ome
4 Select the Select a shared printer by name option. Enter the URL for your printer, http://
192.168.1.1:631/printers/USB_PRINTER, in this example. This URL can be found in the
Device’s Web Configurator on the Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server screen.
Click Next.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
57
Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welc ome
5 Install the printer driver. Please check the Windows CD if it includes the printer driver. If not, please
install the driver from the CD included with your printer or by downloading it from the printer
vendor’s website.
6 After the printer driver installs successfully, choose if you want to set this printer to be the default.
Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X
Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer.
1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series of icons/
shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. If the Print Center icon is
not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step.
2 On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window.
Tutorial: Mac intosh HD
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
58
3 Double-click the Applications folder.
Tutorial: Macintosh HD folder
4 Double-click the Utilities folder.
Tutorial: Ap plications Fold er
5 Double-click the Print Center icon.
Tutorial: Utili ties Folder
6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen.
Tutorial: Printer List Folder
7 Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-
down list box.
8 In the Printer’s Address field, type the IP address of your Device.
9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box.
10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
59
11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select
Generic.
Tutorial: Printer Configuration
12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration screen.
Tutorial: Printer Model
13 The Name LP1 on 192.168.1.1 displays in the Printer List field. The default printer Name
displays in bold type.
Tutorial: Print Server
Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the Device’s print server to
print from a Macintosh computer.
60
PART II
Technical Reference
61
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
62
CHAPTER 5
Network Map and Status Screens
5.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network
connection status of the Device and clients connected to it.
You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and
interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
5.2 The Network Map Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
Figure 15 Network Map: Icon View Mode
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
63
If you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and Info. Click the IP address
if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/
icon.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh interval.
Figure 16 Network Map: List View Mode
5.3 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 17 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification.
Model Number This shows the model number of your Device.
Serial Number This shows the unique serial number of your Device.
Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device.
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
64
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
WAN Type This shows wherther it’s a DSL, Ethernet or 3G WAN connection..
WAN Name This is the namke of the interface.
MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your
Device.
IPv4 Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Release to
release your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Renew.
IPv4 Subnet
Mask
This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
IPv4 Uptime This shows how long the Device has had the IP address.
Primary DNS
server
This shows the primary DNS server IP address.
Secondary DNS
server
This shows the secondary DNS server IP address.
Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method.
LAN Information
IPv4 Address This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN.
IPv4 Subnet
Mask
This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and
responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your
Device.
WLAN Information
MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of the wireless
interface.
Status This displays whether the WLAN is activated.
SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN.
Channel This is the channel number used by the wireless interface now.
Security This displays the type of security mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless
LAN.
802.11 Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS This displays whether WPS is activated on the wireless interface.
Security
Firewall This displays the firewall’s current security level.
System Status
System Up
Time
This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The
Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or
when you reset it.
Current Date/
Time
This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in
Maintenance> Time Setting.
System Resource
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
65
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s processing ability is currently used.
When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the
throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have
more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see
Chapter 10 on page 148).
Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s memory is currently used. Usually,
this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the
Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section
39.2 on page 270, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.
NAT Session
Usage
This field displays what percentage of the Device supported NAT sessions are currently
being used.
Interface Status
Interface This column displays each interface the Device has.
Status This field indicates the interface’s use status.
For the LAN and Ethernet WAN interfaces, this field displays Up when using the interface
and NoLink when not using the interface.
For a WLAN interface, this field displays the enabled (Active) or disabled (InActive)
state of the interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line down), Up (line up or connected),
Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation, and NoLink when not using
the interface.
For the 3G USB interface, this field displays Up when using the interface and NoDevice
when no device is detected in any USB slot.
Rate For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate or N/A with WLAN
disabled.
For the 3G USB interface, this field displays Up when a 3G USB device is installed in a
USB slot and NoDevice when no device is detected in any USB slot.
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
66
CHAPTER 6
Broadband
6.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the Device’s Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your
Device for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 18 LAN and WAN
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the
WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 70).
•Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 6.3 on page 79).
•Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR
functions (Section 6.4 on page 83).
•Use the 802.1x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the Device (Section
6.5 on page 86).
•Use the Ethernet WAN screen to convert LAN port number four as a WAN port or restore the
WAN to a LAN port (Section 6.6 on page 87). This is for Ethernet connection.
WAN
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
67
6.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es).
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data
transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of
Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit
(VC) between Finding Out More
Table 6 WAN Setup Overview
LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION
CONNECTION
DSL LINK
TYPE
MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS
ADSL/VDSL
over PTM
N/A Routing PPPoE PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP
address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
IPoE IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing
feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
Bridge N/A VLAN and QoS
ADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE/PPPoA ATM PVC configuration, PPP
information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address,
routing feature, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
IPoE/IPoA ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6
IP address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
Bridge N/A ATM PVC configuration, and QoS
Ethernet
N/A
Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN
IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing
feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
IPoE WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT,
DNS server and routing feature
Bridge N/A VLAN and QoS
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
68
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM,
packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed
to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an
alternative to ATM.
IPv6 Introduction
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 10
38
IP
addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and
supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD).
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So
2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as
2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So
2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as
2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
IPv6 Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
69
IPv6 Rapid Deployment
Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment (6rd) when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4
network. When the Device has an IPv4 WAN address and you set IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only,
you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISP’s IPv4 network.
The Device generates a global IPv6 prefix from its IPv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the
ISP’s Border Relay router (BR in the figure) to connect to the native IPv6 Internet. The local
network can also use IPv4 services. The Device uses it’s configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4
traffic to the IPv4 Internet.
Figure 19 IPv6 Rapid Deployment
Dual Stack Lite
Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network.
When the Device has an IPv6 WAN address and you set IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv6 Only, you can
enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services.
The Device tunnels IPv4 packets inside IPv6 encapsulation packets to the ISP’s Address Family
Transition Router (AFTR in the graphic) to connect to the IPv4 Internet. The local network can also
use IPv6 services. The Device uses it’s configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6
Internet.
ISP (IPv4)
IPv6 Internet
IPv4
IPv6
BR
IPv6 in IPv4
IPv4 Internet
IPv4
+
LAN
- IPv6
- IPv4
WAN
- IPv4
- IPv6 in IPv4
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
70
Figure 20 Dual Stack Lite
6.1.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
6.2 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s Internet access settings. Click Network Setting >
Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the Device.
Figure 21 Network Setting > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
ISP (IPv6)
IPv6 Internet
IPv6
AFTR
IPv4 in IPv6
IPv4 Internet
IPv6
IPv4
+
LAN
- IPv6
- IPv4
WAN
- IPv6
- IPv4 in IPv6
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New WAN
Interface
Click this button to create a new connection.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This is the service name of the connection.
Type This shows whether it is an ATM, Ethernet or a PTM connection.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
71
Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode.
Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
802.1p This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned.
802.1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned.
IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection.
Default
Gateway
This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when
the connection uses the bridging service.
MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this
connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection.
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
72
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection
Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN
interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select.
6.2.1.1 Routing Mode
Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL/VDSL over ATM connection
type, Routing mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface
type, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode.
Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode)
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
73
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to enable the interface.
Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection.
Type Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet.
Mode Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This
option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/
VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over
ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA.
IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Device to run IPv4 only.
Select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.
Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type The choices in this field change according to the Encapsulation method chosen above. This
field is not editable. PPPoA and IPoA encapsulation use the same named DSL Link Type.
Ethernet-over-ATM (EoA) is used for PPPoE, and IPoE encapsulation.
EoA a protocol for data transfer between Ethernet LAN and WAN over the ATM protocol. It
creates a bridged connection between the Device and the ISP. It uses an Ethernet header in
the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set
each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but
use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and
RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation
Mode
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
• LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
• VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
• LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field.
• LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
74
Service
Category
Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
PPP Information (This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.)
PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form
user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly
as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select password unmask to
show your entered password in plain text.
PPP Trigger
Type
Select when to have the Device establish the PPP connection.
Auto Connect - select this to not let the connection time out.
Connect on Demand - select this to automatically bring up the connection when the
Device receives packets destined for the Internet.
Manual - select this if you want to manually trigger the connection up.
Authentication
Method
Select an authentication protocol for outgoing connection requests through this WAN
interface.
PAP - Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) authentication sends user name and
password in clear text without using encryption. Select this if your Device accepts PAP only.
CHAP - Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) provides authentication
through a shared secret key and uses a three way handshake. Select this if your Device
accepts CHAP only.
MSCHAP - Microsoft CHAP provides authentication through a shared secret key and uses a
three way handshake. It provides improved usability with Microsoft products. Select this if
your Device accepts MSCHAP only.
AUTO - Select this if your Device accepts either PAP, CHAP, or MSCHAP authentication
method.
Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically
disconnects from the PPPoE server.
This field is not configurable if you select Auto Connect in the PPP Trigger Type field.
PPPoE Service
Name
Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
PPPoE
Passthrough
This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow
up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the
ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client
software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
IP Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
75
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you
have a dynamic IP address.
DHCP
option 60/
Vendor ID
This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the class vender ID you
want the Device to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server.
DHCP
option 61
IAD
This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the Identity Association
Identifier (IAD) you want the Device to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the
DHCP server.
DHCP
option 61
DUID
This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the DHCP Unique Identifier
(DUID) you want the Device to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP
server.
DHCP
option 43
Enable
This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the vender specific
information you want the Device to add in the DHCP Offer packets. The information is used,
for example, for configuring an ACS’s (Auto Configuration Server) URL.
Static IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Subnet
Mask
Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.)
NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
Fullcone NAT
Enable
Select this option to enable full cone NAT on this connection. This field is available only when
you activate NAT. In full cone NAT, the Device maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP
address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The Device also
maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and
port.
IGMP Proxy
Enable
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
DNS Server (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
DNS Select Obtain DNS Info Automically if you want the Device to use the DNS server
addresses assigned by your ISP.
Select Use Following Static DNS Address if you want the Device to use the DNS server
addresses you configure manually.
DNS Server1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
76
Tunnel (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field.)
The DS-Lite (Dual Stack Lite) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv6 Only.
Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP’s IPv6 network. See Dual Stack Lite on
page 69 for more information.
The 6RD (IPv6 rapid deployment) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only. See
IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 69 for more information.
Enable DS-Lite This is available only when you select IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. Select
Enable to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP’s IPv6 network.
DS-Lite Relay
Server IP
Specify the transition router’s IPv6 address.
Enable 6RD This is available only when you select IPv4 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. Select
Enable to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISP’s IPv4 network.
6RD Type Select Static if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server, otherwise select DHCP to
have the Device detect it automatically through DHCP.
IPv4 Mask
Length
Enter the subnet mask number (1~32) for the IPv4 network.
6RD Border
Relay Server IP
When you set the 6RD Type to Static, specify the relay server’s IPv4 address in this field.
6RD IPv6 Prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling IPv6 traffic to the ISP’s border relay router and connecting
to the native IPv6 Internet.
IPv6 Address (This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
IPv6 Address Select Automatic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected
router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.
• Select Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server(IA_NA) if you want to obtain an IPv6
address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority
over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an
RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address
automatically.
• Select Prefix Delegation(IA_PD) to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) which enables
the Device to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use
the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
Select None to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection.
Prefix
Length
Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address
compose the network address.
Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
IPv6 Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the
IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.)
MLD Proxy
Enable
Select this checkbox to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6 DNS
Server
Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
77
6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode
Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon
next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen
varies depending on the interface type you select.
If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
IPv6 DNS Select Dynamic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP
automatically.
Select Static to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure
manually.
IPv6 DNS
Server 1
Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 DNS
Server 2
Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM.)
Active Select this to enable VLAN on this WAN interface.
802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
WAN Outgoing
Default Tag
Select Enable and enter a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value to have the Device add it in the
packets sent by this WAN interface.
802.1p This field displays if you activate VLAN for this WAN interface. Enter a priority level (from 0
to 7) to have the Device add it to traffic through this connection.
DSCP If you enable Select WAN Outgoing Default Tag, enter a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point)
value to have the Device add it in the packets sent by this WAN interface.
MTU
MTU Size Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic.
Bridging and
Routing in the
same WAN
Use this feature to bridge a LAN port(s) with the WAN interface. Traffic to/from LAN ports
not in the bridge is routed from the WAN interface.
ADSL use same VPI/VCI in Bridge and Route modes.
VDSL use same VLAN in Bridge and Route modes.
Enable Con-
current WAN
Enable this if you want to use the same VPI/VCI settings in different WAN interfaces. Select
this and then choose the ports to bridge with the WAN interface. \
• ADSL concurrent WAN uses the same VCI/PVI in both routing and bridge modes.
• VDSL concurrent WAN uses same VLAN in both routing and bridge mode.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
78
Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Bridge Mode)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Bridge Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to enable the interface.
Name Enter a service name of the connection.
Type Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses
the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field.
Active Select this to enable VLAN on this WAN interface.
802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
79
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen
The USB ports (at the left side panel of the Device) allow you to attach a 3G dongle to wirelessly
connect to a 3G network for Internet access. You can have the Device use the 3G WAN connection
as a backup. Disconnect the DSL and Ethernet WAN ports to use the 3G dongle as your primary
WAN connection. The Device automatically uses a wired WAN connection when available.
Note: This Device supports connecting one 3G dongle at a time.
Figure 24 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN
Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G
Backup.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
80
Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal
strength to the service provider’s base station, and so on.
Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
3G Backup Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the
wired WAN connection fails.
Ping Check Select Enable if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You
can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before
triggering 3G backup.
Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field.
Consecutive
PING Fail
Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered.
Ping Default
Gateway
Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interface’s default gateway IP address.
Ping the Host Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this
field.
3G Connection Settings
Card
description
This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in
the Device. Otherwise, it displays N/A.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
81
Username Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service
provider.
Password Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name
above.
PIN A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code,
you cannot use the 3G card.
If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example)
provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by
your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet.
If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank.
Dial string Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service provider’s
base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number.
For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan.
APN Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with
different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media
Messaging Service)) and charge method.
You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out.
Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle
time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.
Max Idle
Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically
disconnects from the ISP.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
Select this option if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Use the
following static
IP address
Select this option if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP
address.
Obtain DNS
info
dynamically
Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically.
Use the
following static
DNS IP address
Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
Primary
DNS server
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Secondary
DNS server
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Enable Email
Notification
Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a
notification when the 3G connection is up.
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
3G backup
Send Email
Title
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device
sends.
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
82
Send
Notification to
Email
Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings.
Budget Setup
Enable Budget
Control
Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can
set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified
when a limit is exceeded during the month.
Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used
within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control,
the Device resets the statistics.
Data Budget
(Mbytes)
Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Data Budget
(kPackets)
Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Reset all
budget
counters on
Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select last if you want
the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select specific and enter the
number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget
Reset time and
data budget
counters
Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with
the 3G connection’s full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the
normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to
reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data
budget counters will still reset on the second.
Actions before
over budget
Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds.
Enable % of
time budget/
data budget
(Mbytes)/data
budget
(kPackets)
Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the
value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.
Actions when
over budget
Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded.
Current 3G
connection
Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it.
Actions
Enable Email
Notification
Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a
notification when there over budget occurs.
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
83
6.4 The Advanced Screen
Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable ADSL over PTM, Annex M, DSL PhyR, and SRA
(Seamless Rate Adaptation) functions. The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR
is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It
improves voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer.
ITU-T G.993.2 standard defines a wide range of settings for various parameters, some of which are
encompassed in profiles as shown in the next table.
Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen.
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
Over Budget
Email Title
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device
sends.
Send
Notification to
Email
Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you.
Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field.
Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 11 VDSL Profiles
PROFILE
BANDWIDTH
(MHZ)
NUMBER OF
DOWNSTREAM
CARRIERS
CARRIER
BANDWIDTH
(KHZ)
POWER (DBM)
MAX.
DOWNSTREAM
THROUGHPUT
(MBIT/S)
8a 8.832 2048 4.3125 17.5 50
8b 8.832 2048 4.3125 20.5 50
8c 8.5 1972 4.3125 11.5 50
8d 8.832 2048 4.3125 14.5 50
12a 12 2783 4.3125 14.5 68
12b 12 2783 4.3125 14.5 68
17a 17.664 4096 4.3125 14.5 100
30a 30 3479 8.625 14.5 200
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
84
Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US
should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However,
enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the
CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it
enabled.
PhyR DS Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN.
PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise.
However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will
require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and
have it enabled.
Bitswap
SRA Enable or disable Seamless Rate Adaption (SRA). Select Enable to have the Device
automatically adjust the connection’s data rate according to line conditions without
interrupting service.
ADSL
Modulation
PTM over
ADSL:
Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs
use this for better performance.
G.Dmt: ITU G.992.1 (better known as G.dmt) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone
modulation. G.dmt full-rate ADSL expands the usable bandwidth of existing copper
telephone lines, delivering high-speed data communications at rates up to 8 Mbit/s
downstream and 1.3 Mbit/s upstream.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
85
G.lite : ITU G.992.2 (better known as G.lite) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone
modulation. G.lite does not strictly require the use of DSL filters, but like all variants of
ADSL generally functions better with splitters.
T1.413 : ANSI T1.413 is a technical standard that defines the requirements for the single asymmetric
digital subscriber line (ADSL) for the interface between the telecommunications network and
the customer installation in terms of their interaction and electrical characteristics.
ADSL2 : It optionally extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates to 12 Mbit/s downstream
and, depending on Annex version, up to 3.5 Mbit/s upstream (with a mandatory capability
of ADSL2 transceivers of 8 Mbit/s downstream and 800 kbit/s upstream).
AnnexL : Annex L is an optional specification in the ITU-T ADSL2 recommendation G.992.3 titled
Specific requirements for a Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2) system operating in the
frequency band above POTS, therefore it is often referred to as Reach Extended ADSL2 or
READSL2.The main difference between this specification and commonly deployed Annex A is
the maximum distance that can be used. The power of the lower frequencies used for
transmitting data is boosted up to increase the reach of this signal up to 7 kilometers
(23,000 ft).
ADSL2+ : ADSL2+ extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream
channels. The data rates can be as high as 24 Mbit/s downstream and up to 1.4 Mbit/s
upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises.
AnnexM : Annex M is an optional specification in ITU-T recommendations G.992.3 (ADSL2) and
G.992.5 (ADSL2+), also referred to as ADSL2 M and ADSL2+ M. This specification extends
the capability of commonly deployed Annex A by more than doubling the number of
upstream bits. The data rates can be as high as 12 or 24 Mbit/s downstream and 3 Mbit/s
upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises.
VDSL Profile VDSL2 profiles differ in the width of the frequency band used to transmit the broadband
signal. Profiles that use a wider frequency band can deliver higher maximum speeds.
8a, 8b, 8c, 8d,
12a, 12b, 17a,
US0
The G.993.2 VDSL standard defines a wide range of profiles that can be used in different
VDSL deployment settings, such as in a central office, a street cabinet or a building.
The Device must comply with at least one profile specified in G.993.2. but compliance with
more than one profile is allowed.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
86
6.5 The 802.1x Screen
You can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 802.1x screen. Click
Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x to display the following screen.
Figure 27 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Network Setting > Network Setting > 802.1x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that
this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active.
Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
interface assigned.
EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP
identity assigned.
EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
EAP method assigned.
Bidirectional
Authentication
This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed.
Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
certificate assigned.
Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
Trusted CA assigned.
Modify Click this icon to edit an item.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
87
6.5.1 Modify 802.1X Settings
Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want
to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 28 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x > Modify
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen
Use the Ethernet WAN screen to convert LAN port number four as a WAN port and to restore it
back from a WAN to a LAN port for Ethernet Internet access.
Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x: Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication.
Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without
having to delete the entry.
Interface Select an interface to which the authentication applies.
EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication.
EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication.
Enable
Bidirectional
Authentication
Select this to allow bidirectional authentication.
Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen.
Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
88
It’s not enough to just enable LAN 4 as a WAN connection here. You must also go to Network
Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface screen and create a new interface for it with
the Type as Ethernet and Encapsulation as IPoE, and it’s advisable to enable NAT.
You cannot have DSL Ethernet and 3G WAN connections working at the same time. The order of
priority for the WAN connections are:
1 DSL
2 Ethernet
3 3G
Click Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN to display the following screen.
Figure 29 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.7 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode
or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods.
Table 15 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select Enable to convert LAN port number four to a WAN port.
Disable Select Disable to restore LAN port number four to a LAN port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
89
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an
Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface
and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged
environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA)
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on
RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information
on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a
manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how
a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.)
connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on
the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
90
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 30 Example of Traffic Shaping
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
91
ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and default gateway.
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
92
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast
(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the
network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to
read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please
see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be
in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group
and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is
assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the
224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast
routers group.
At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After
that, the Device periodically updates this information.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
Chapter 6 Broadband
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
93
important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access
it.
The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you
sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Device’s WAN IP
address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
94
CHAPTER 7
Wireless
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Device’s Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to
set up your Device’s wireless connection.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This section describes the Device’s Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Device’s
wireless connection.
•Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 7.2 on page 95).
•Use the Guest / More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section
7.3 on page 99).
•Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 7.4 on page 102).
•Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal
Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 103).
•Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless
networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 105).
•Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a
bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 7.7 on page 106).
•Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 7.8 on page 108).
•Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results
(Section 7.9 on page 110).
7.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwowaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with
one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
95
Finding Out More
See Section 7.10 on page 111 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
7.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN
and you change the Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the
wireless settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen.
Figure 31 Network Setting > Wireless > General
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
96
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 16 Network Setting > Wireless > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used
by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.
Channel Use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use.
more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
Bandwidth Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz
channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.Select 20MHz if
you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or
the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
Control
Sideband
This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth
field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the
Lower or Upper range of channel bands.
Passphrase
Type
If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the
setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password.
Select None to set the Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.
Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It
must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no
spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
Max. Upstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
Max.
Downstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is
enabled.
Security Level
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
97
7.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 32 Wireless > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be
enabled at any one time.
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 16 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 17 Wireless > General: No Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or
authentication.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
98
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the
General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 33 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common
password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong
as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of
the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it
less robust than it could be.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Table 18 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password 1~4 The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless
stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one
time.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
99
Figure 34 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.3 The Guest / More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP. The following screen displays.
Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of
user-specific credentials.
If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-
shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA-PSK
Compatible
This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your
Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
key out to all clients.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
100
Figure 35 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.3.1 Edit Guest / More AP
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the Guest / More AP
screen. The following screen displays.
Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active.
A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device’s BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client
scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless
client utility.
Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN.
If Home Guest displays, clients can connect to each other directly.
If External Guest displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
N/A displays if guest WLAN is disabled.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
101
Figure 36 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP > Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP > Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Passphrase
Type
Passphrase type cannot be changed. The default is None.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
102
7.4 MAC Authentication
This screen allows you to configure the Device to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow)
or exclude specific devices from accessing the Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in
the Access Scenario field.
Access
Scenario
If you select Home Guest, clients can connect to each other directly.
If you select External Guest, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
Maximum
Upstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
Maximum
Downstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is
enabled.
E-mail notification when the wireless guest visit
Enable Email
Notification
Select this to have the Device e-mail you a notification when a wireless client is connected
to the wireless network.
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device
sends.
Send
Notification to
Email
Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Security Level
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See Section 7.2.1 on page 97 for more details about this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest / More AP > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
103
Use this screen to view your Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 37 Wireless > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device.
Table 22 Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to
access the Device.
Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access
to the Device.
Add new MAC
address
Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that
is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
# This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device.
Delete Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
104
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 7.10.9.3 on page 120 for more information about WPS.
Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on
page 95). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security
mode of SSID1 to WPA2-PSK or No Security.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click
Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
2.4GHz WPS Setup
WPS
Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC).
Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 1 on the Device.
Connect Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the
Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the
outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing
this button.
Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the
Device. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 2 on the Device.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
105
7.6 The WMM Screen
Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for
multimedia applications.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays.
Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click
Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN
to the Device.
Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the
client. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 3 on the Device.
Release
Configuratio
n
The default WPS status is configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the Device.
Generate
New PIN
Number
If this method has been enabled, the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is
shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to
using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the Device create a new PIN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
106
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.7 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to
configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and
other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any
wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays.
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
LABEL DESCRIPTION
2.4GHz WMM Setup
WMM Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the
ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of
Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
WMM
Automatic
Power Save
Delivery
Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for
small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to
save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device
until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.
Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also
supports this feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
107
Figure 40 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
2.4GHz Wireless Bridge Setup
AP Mode Select the operating mode for your Device.
• Access Point - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously.
• Wireless Bridge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes
wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device
wirelessly.
Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point.
Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the
table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS.
Remote Bridge
MAC Address
You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify.
# This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address
format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
Scan Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
108
7.7.1 WDS Scan
You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the Device automatically search and
display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a
wireless link with the selected wireless device.
Figure 41 WDS: Scan
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.8 The Others Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >
Others. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 7.10.2 on page 113 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Table 26 WDS: Scan
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Scan Setup
Refresh Click Refresh to update the table.
# This is the index number of the entry.
SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
109
Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS
(Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
Fragmentation
Threshold
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
2346.
Auto Channel
Timer
If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen,
specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0
to disable the periodical scan.
Output Power Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease
the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%,
40%, 60%, 80% or 100%.
Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.
This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.
The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power
mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms.
A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM
value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1
to 255.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
110
7.9 The Channel Status Screen
Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to
scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section.
Note: The Scan button only works when the Device uses 20MHz for the wireless channel
width. You can go to the
Network Setting > Wireless > General screen, click the
more link, and then change the channel width setting in the Bandwidth field.
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced.
Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device
might be reduced.
802.11
Protection
Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with
both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This
helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b
Only.
Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See
Section 7.10.7 on page 117 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
111
Figure 43 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status
7.10 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see Appendix B on page 293.
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
112
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 44 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
113
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device’s Web
Configurator.
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not
aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP
at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the
more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then
wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device.
Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device
does, it cannot communicate with the Device.
Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation
Threshold
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
114
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
7.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide
the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should
change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.
1
A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters
2
; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to
use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the
correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
7.10.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
115
7.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section
7.10.3.3 on page 114 for information about this.)
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have
a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
7.10.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
116
7.10.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 45 Basic Service set
7.10.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Device’s
MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to
provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
117
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
7.10.7 Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the
security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 46 WDS Link Example
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless
network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
WDS
AP 2
AP 1
A
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
118
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
7.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
2 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see
Section 7.6 on page 105).
3 Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the Device you must press the
WPS button for more than three seconds.
4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
7.10.9.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2 Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
119
3 Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
Device, see Section 7.5 on page 103).
4 Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
5 If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
120
Figure 47 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
7.10.9.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
ENROLLEE
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
This device’s
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
WPS
from other device:
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
START
WPS
START
REGISTRAR
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
121
Figure 48 How WPS works
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
7.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WPS HANDSHAKE
REGISTRARENROLLEE
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
122
Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 50 WPS: Example Network Step 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
REGISTRARENROLLEE
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 1
AP1
ENROLLEE
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
S
E
C
U
R
I
T
Y
I
N
F
O
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
123
Figure 51 WPS: Example Network Step 3
7.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
CLIENT 1
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
S
E
C
U
R
I
T
Y
I
N
F
O
ENROLLEE
AP2
E
X
I
S
T
I
N
G
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
Chapter 7 Wireless
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
124
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
125
CHAPTER 8
Home Networking
8.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
Device (Section 8.2 on page 127).
•Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 131).
•Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 8.4 on page
132).
•Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page
135).
•Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for
Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.6 on page 136)
•Use the TFTP Server screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP
option 66. (Section 8.7 on page 137).
DSL
LAN
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
126
8.1.2 What You Need To Know
8.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet
mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)
When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers,
RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the
minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix.
IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address.
8.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
127
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 11 on page 165 for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See Section 8.4.1 on page 133 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More
See Section 8.8 on page 138 for technical background information on LANs.
8.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click
Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
1 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your Device.
2 Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
128
3 Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Group
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter
15 on page 191 for how to create a new interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IPv4 Address Enter the LAN IPv4 IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation,
for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask/
Prefix Length
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask
based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to
do so.
IGMP Snooping
Status Select the Enable IGMP Snooping checkbox to allows the Device to passively learn
multicast group.
IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the
multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.
Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the
WAN.
DHCP Server State
DHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device.
Select DHCP Relay to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
129
DHCP Relay
Server Address
This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field.
IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
IP Addressing
Values
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Beginning IP
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Ending IP
Address
This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Auto reserve IP
for the same
host
Select Enable to have the Device record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP
addresses are assigned to. The Device assigns the same IP address to the same MAC
address when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP.
DHCP Server
Lease Time
This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP
addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central
computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time,
which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment
to other systems.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Days/Hours/
Minutes
Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service
provider.
Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service.
Select Static if you have the Static DNS service.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes
to the DHCP clients.
LAN IPv6 Mode Setup
IPv6 State
Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device.
LAN IPv6 Address Setup
Delegate prefix
from WAN
Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider
or an uplink router.
Static
Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Device’s LAN IPv6 address.
ULA Pseudo-
Random Global
ID
A unique local address (ULA) is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not
routable in the global IPv6 Internet.
Select this to have the Device automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN
IPv6 address. The address format is like fdxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::/64.
ULA IPv6 Address Setup
IPv6 Address
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the
LAN IPv6 address.
Prefix Length
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to
generate the LAN IPv6 address.
An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the
address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet
mask.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
130
MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence
of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast
groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD
Snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and
learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic.
MLD Mode
Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that
joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN
to all LAN ports.
Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from
the WAN.
LAN IPv6
Address Assign
Setup
Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:
• Stateless: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router
Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix information in
router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server
is disabled.
• Stateful: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is
enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6
clients.
• Stateless and Stateful: The Device uses both IPv6 stateless and stateful
autoconfiguration. The LAN IPv6 clients can obtain IPv6 addresses either through router
advertisements or through DHCPv6.
LAN IPv6 DNS
Assign Setup
Select how the Device provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients:
• From Router Advertisement: The Device provides DNS information through router
advertisements.
• From DHCPv6 Server: The Device provides DNS information through DHCPv6.
• From RA & DHCPv6 Server: The Device provides DNS information through both router
advertisements and DHCPv6.
DHCPv6 Configuration
DHCPv6 State
This shows the status of the DHCPv6.
IPv6 Router Advertisement State
RADVD State
This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not.
IPv6 DNS Values
IPv6 DNS
Server 1-3
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information.
Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server
IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers.
DNS Query
Scenario
Select how the Device handles clients’ DNS information requests.
• IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server: The Device forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6
DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
• IPv6 DNS Server Only: The Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server and
sends clients the DNS information it receives.
• IPv4 DNS Server Only: The Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and
sends clients the DNS information it receives.
• IPv6 DNS Server First: The Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first
and then the IPv4 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
• IPv4 DNS Server First: The Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first
and then the IPv6 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
131
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your Device’s static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home
Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 53 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP
entry, the following screen displays.
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new static
lease
Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device.
MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
132
Figure 54 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 126 for more information on UPnP.
Table 32 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device.
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings.
See Chapter 15 on page 191 for how to create a new interface group.
Select Device Info Select a device or computer from the drop-down list or select Manual Input to manually
enter a device’s MAC address and IP address in the following fields.
MAC Address If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the
computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
133
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Network Setting >
Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7. UPnP server is installed in
Windows 7. Activate UPnP on the Device.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the
Device.
1 Click the start icon, Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center.
Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open
the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you
must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
UPnP NAT-T Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so
that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications
automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP
enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP
enabled application.
The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T.
# This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
IP Address This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device.
External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service.
Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
134
2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings.
3 Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your
computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network
to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
135
8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen
Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet
interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can
also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet).
If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be
accessed from the WAN.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown
next.
Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Alias Setup
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See
Chapter 15 on page 191 for how to create a new interface group.
Active Select the checkbox to configure a LAN network for the Device.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you
assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the
Device.
Public LAN
Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and
Static IP.
IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
136
8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen
Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses
before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an
IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to view the Vendor IDs of
connected STBs and the static DHCP entries that the Device automatically created for them when
they requested IP addresses.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen.
Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.6.1 The Add/Edit STB Vendor ID Screen
Use this screen to configure an STB’s Vendor Class Identifier (DHCP option 60).
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Offer Public IP
by DHCP
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server.
Enable ARP
Proxy
Select the checkbox to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New STB
Vendor
Click this button to manually create an entry.
Vendor ID This is an STB’s Vendor Class Identifier (DHCP option 60). A Vendor Class Identifier is
usually used to inform the DHCP server a DHCP client’s vendor and functionality.
DHCP Option This is the DHCP option 43 value the Device assigns to the STB.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
137
Figure 58 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.7 The TFTP Server Name Screen
Use the TFTP Server screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP
option 66. RFC 2132 defines the option 66 open standard. DHCP option 66 supports the IP address
or the hostname of a single TFTP server.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name to open this screen.
Figure 59 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
LABEL DESCRIPTION
STB Vendor ID Enter an STB’s Vendor Class Identifier which is used for informing the DHCP server the
STB’s vendor and functionality.
DHCP Option 43 Enter the IP address the Device assigns to the STB. Select HEX if it is a hex string.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TFTP Server
Name
Enter the the IP address or the hostname of a single TFTP server.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
138
8.8 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
8.8.1 LANs, WANs and the Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There
are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network
as shown next.
Figure 60 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
8.8.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP
server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for
the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the
product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to
your LAN computers.
8.8.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
WAN
LAN
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
139
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
8.8.4 LAN TCP/IP
The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device.
The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select
192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the
network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is
using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
Chapter 8 Home Networking
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
140
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
141
CHAPTER 9
Routing
9.1 Overview
The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN
to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway,
use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Device’s LAN interface. The
Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device’s default gateway (R1). You
create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create
another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the
LAN.
Figure 61 Example of Routing Topology
9.2 The Routing Screen
Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click Network Setting
> Routing > Static Route to open the following screen.
WAN
R1
R2
A
R3
LAN
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
142
Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or
the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 63 Routing: Add/Edit
Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new static
route
Click this to configure a new static route.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
143
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.3 The DNS Route Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Network Setting >
Routing > DNS Route to open the following screen.
Figure 64 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Routing: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to
delete the entry.
Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Destination IP
Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination.
IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of
255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to
the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Gateway IP
Address
The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN
port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 40 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new DNS
Route
Click this to add a new DNS route.
# This is the index number of a DNS route.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
144
9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen
You can manually add the Device’s DNS route entry. Click Add new DNS Route in the Network
Setting > Routing > DNS Route screen. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 65 DNS Route Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.4 The Policy Forwarding Screen
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest
path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing
behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator.
Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different
connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.
Domain Name This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry.
Interface This is the WAN connection through which the Device forwards DNS requests for this domain
name.
Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry.
Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route.
Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route.
Table 40 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 41 DNS Route Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain Name Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry.
Interface Select the WAN connection through which the Device forwards DNS requests for this domain
name.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry.
OK Click this to save your changes.
Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
145
The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click
Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen.
Figure 66 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Policy
Forward Rule
Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Policy Name This is the name of the rule.
Source IP This is the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask
his is the source subnet mask address.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.
Source Port This is the source port number.
WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy.
Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the policy.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
146
9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding
Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next
to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 67 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
9.5 RIP
Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing
information with other routers.
Table 43 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Source IP Enter the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask
Enter the source subnet mask address.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Source Port Enter the source port number.
Source MAC Enter the source MAC address.
WAN Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN
interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 9 Routing
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
147
9.5.1 The RIP Screen
Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen.
Figure 68 RIP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 RIP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP
packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP
version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP
version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual
network topology.
Operation Select Passive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP
packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other
routers in this interface.
Select Active to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for
routing updates from neighboring routers.
Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
148
CHAPTER 10
Quality of Service (QoS)
10.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned
a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion,
allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both
those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as
Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section
10.3 on page 150).
•The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 151).
•The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 153).
•The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 10.5 on page 153).
10.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
149
similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different
priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS).
IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted
with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token
Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate.
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single
Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
(Before Traffic Shaping)
(After Traffic Shaping)
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Time
Traffic Rate
(Before Traffic Policing)
(After Traffic Policing)
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
150
which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.7 on page 160 for more information on
each metering algorithm.
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on
page 148 for more information.
Figure 69 Network Settings > QoS > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Network Setting > QoS > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate
using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed.
For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has
an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The Device
uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this
number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will
cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the
WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
151
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
LAN Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that
you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you
use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This
will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’
maximum supported connection speed.
Upstream
traffic priority
Assigned by
Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.
• None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues
according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the
classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority.
• Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level.
• IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS
field in the IP header.
• Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets
get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time
packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like
file transfers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 45 Network Setting > QoS > General (continued) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
152
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 71 Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface This shows the name of the Device’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
Priority This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer
Management
This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it
receives too many (network congestion).
Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
Table 47 Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
153
10.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface.
Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority
to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority
queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the
queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than
queues with smaller weights.
Buffer
Management
This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management
algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full.
Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer
again (packets are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 47 Queue Setup: Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
154
Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class
Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open
the following screen.
Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
Class Name This is the name of the classifier.
Classification
Criteria
This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which
traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this
classifier.
DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
155
Figure 73 Class Setup: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable this classifier.
Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
156
Classification
Order
Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to
the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From
Interface drop-down list box.
Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address,
DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.
Source
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Destination
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Others
Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined
application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the
filter fields.
Table 49 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
157
IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If
you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number.
DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier
(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the user’s
category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
Packet
Length
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in
the fields provided.
DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the
field provided.
802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.
TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge)
flag.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the
packets.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the
packets.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.
VLAN ID If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID
of the frames.
If you select Remove, the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding
them out.
If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
Forward to
Interface
Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select
Unchange, the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
Table 49 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
158
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming
traffic. Click Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 74 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 49 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
Regulated
Classes
This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the
member QoS classes.
Action This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to
the policer’s member QoS classes.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
159
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer
Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the
following screen.
Figure 75 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to activate this policer.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.
The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be
transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes
which is also the bucket size.
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the
Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the
Peak Information Rate (PIR).
Committed
Rate
Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is
less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic.
Committed
Burst Size
Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the
peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also
configured.
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
160
10.7 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Conforming
Action
Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-
marked packets).
• Pass: Send the packets without modification.
• DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use.
Non-
Conforming
Action
Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and
burst size (red-marked packets).
• Drop: Discard the packets.
• DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.
Available Class
Selected Class
Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier.
Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the
Selected Class box.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 51 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 52 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
161
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the
same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority
level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Table 52 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
162
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the
Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The
bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b
bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated
and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the
size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the bucket.
Table 53 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
PRIORITY
QUEUE
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
0 1 0 000000
12
2 0 0 000000 >1100
3 3 1 001110
001100
001010
001000
250~1100
4 4 2 010110
010100
010010
010000
5 5 3 011110
011100
011010
011000
<250
6 6 4 100110
100100
100010
100000
5 101110
101000
7 7 6 110000
111000
7
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
163
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are
generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following
ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
•Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network
is overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface
can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller
the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be
dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10
kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens
are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green.
Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it
exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in
the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the CBS bucket.
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet
is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked
red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
164
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider
and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR
and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in
bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens
are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked
green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater
than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
165
CHAPTER 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -
NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source
address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within
another network.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 166).
•Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network (Section 11.3 on page 169).
•Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Device’s trigger port settings (Section
11.4 on page 171).
•Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 173).
•Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section
11.6 on page 174).
•Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section
11.7 on page 175).
•Use the Sessions screen to configure the Device's maximum number of NAT sessions (Section
11.7 on page 175).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
166
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 11.9 on page 177 for advanced technical information on NAT.
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix D on page 314. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
167
Figure 76 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix D on page 314 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 77 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 54 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to add a new rule.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet’s destination IP address.
Server IP
Address
This is the server’s IP address.
Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
A=192.168.1.33
D=192.168.1.36
C=192.168.1.3
B=192.168.1.34
WAN
LAN
192.168.1.1
IP Address assigned by ISP
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
168
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding
Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to
open the following screen.
Figure 78 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Translation
Start Port
This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Translation End
Port
This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/
UDP.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Table 54 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 55 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
169
11.3 The Applications Screen
This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this
screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen
appears.
Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packet’s
destination IP address doesn’t match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will
not be applied.
Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the End Port field.
End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then
enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port
number in the Start Port field above.
Translation
Start Port
This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port.
For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming
ports translated.
Translation End
Port
This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol
Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 55 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
170
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.3.1 Add New Application
This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the
Applications screen to open the following screen.
Figure 80 Applications: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new
application
Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Forwarded
This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Server IP
Address
This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule.
Table 57 Applications: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Application
Category
Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
Application
Forwarded
Select a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the
protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application
Fowarded.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
171
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to
the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the
Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the
Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that
computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in
the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a
different LAN computer to use the application.
For example:
Figure 81 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2 Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The
Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4 The Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The
Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP
(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to
view your Device’s trigger port settings.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
172
Figure 82 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering
screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Table 58 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Start
Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Trigger End
Port
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
173
Figure 83 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.5 The DMZ Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup
screen.
Table 59 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to enable this rule.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start
Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End
Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
174
Figure 84 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Device’s private
IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an
outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this
screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG.
Figure 85 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not
specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets
received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
175
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen
Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify.
When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the
remaining rules are ignored.
Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen.
Figure 86 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work
correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
SIP ALG
Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-
mapping rules.
RTSP ALG
Enable this to have the Device detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its
NAT. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 62 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
Set This is the index number of the address mapping set.
Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
176
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule
To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rule’s edit icon in the Address
Mapping screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 87 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Type This is the address mapping type.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
Table 62 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 63 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Local Start IP
Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
177
11.8 The Sessions Screen
Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use. Click Network
Setting > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen.
Figure 88 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
11.9 Technical Reference
This part contains more information regarding NAT.
Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 63 Address Mapping: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 64 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAX NAT
Session Per
Host
Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can
have.
If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve
their performance. With heavy peer-to-peer application use, lower this number to ensure no
single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions.
Apply Click this to save your changes on this screen.
Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
178
11.9.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
11.9.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall
protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing
intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC
1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
Table 65 NAT Definitions
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Inside This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
LAN.
Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
WAN.
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
179
11.9.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have
their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 89 How NAT Works
11.9.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
SA
192.168.1.10
SA
IGA1
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
NAT Table
WAN
LAN
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
180
Figure 90 NAT Application With IP Alias
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples
and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
Table 66 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES PORT NUMBER
ECHO 7
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25
DNS (Domain Name System) 53
Finger 79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161
SNMP trap 162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
181
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 91 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
D=192.168.1.36
192.168.1.1
IP address assigned by ISP
A=192.168.1.33
B=192.168.1.34
C=192.168.1.35
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
182
CHAPTER 12
Dynamic DNS Setup
12.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static
or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain
domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system
DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do
not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it
creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page
183).
•Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device
(Section 12.3 on page 184).
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
183
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Network Setting > DNS to
open the DNS Entry screen.
Figure 92 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry
You can manually add or edit the Device’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new DNS
entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen
shown next appears.
Figure 93 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new DNS
entry
Click this to create a new DNS entry.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name.
IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
184
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 94 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 68 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 69 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Setup
Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
Username Type your user name.
Password Type the password assigned to you.
Dynamic DNS Status
User
Authentication
Result
This shows Success if the account is correctly set up with the Dynamic DNS provider
account.
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
185
Last Updated
Time
This shows the last time the IP address the Dynamic DNS provider has associated
with the hostname was updated.
Current Dynamic
IP
This shows the IP address your Dynamic DNS provider has currently associated with
the hostname.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 69 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
186
CHAPTER 13
IGMP/MLD
13.1 Overview
Use the IGMP/MLD screen to configure IGMP/MLD group settings.
13.1.1 What You Need To Know
Multicast and IGMP
See Multicast on page 92 for more information.
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
• MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
• MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
• MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
• An MLD Report message is equivalent to an IGMP Report message, and a MLD Done message is
equivalent to an IGMP Leave message.
IGMP Fast Leave
When a host leaves a multicast group (224.1.1.1), it sends an IGMP leave message to inform all
routers (224.0.0.2) in the multicast group. When a router receives the leave message, it sends a
specific query message to all multicast group (224.1.1.1) members to check if any other hosts are
still in the group. Then the router deletes the host’s information.
With the IGMP fast leave feature enabled, the router removes the host’s information from the group
member list once it receives a leave message from a host and the fast leave timer expires.
13.2 The IGMP/MLD Screen
Use this screen to configure multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports have joined it.
To open this screen, click Network Setting > IGMP/MLD.
Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
187
Figure 95 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP/MLD Configuration
Default Version Enter the version of IGMP (1~3) and MLD (1~2) that you want the Device to use on the
WAN.
Query Interval Enter the number of seconds the Device sends a query message to hosts to get the group
membership information.
Query
Response
Interval
Enter the maximum number of seconds the Device can wait for receiving a General Query
message. Multicast routers use general queries to learn which multicast groups have
members.
Last Member
Query Interval
Enter the maximum number of seconds the Device can wait for receiving a response to a
Group-Specific Query message. Multicast routers use group-specific queries to learn
whether any member remains in a specific multicast group.
Robustness
Value
Enter the number of times (1~7) the Device can resend a packet if packet loss occurs due to
network congestion.
Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
188
Maximum
Multicast
Groups
Enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface on the Device is allowed
to join. Once a multicast member is registered in the specified number of multicast groups,
any new IGMP or MLD join report frames are dropped by the interface.
Maximum
Multicast Data
Sources
Enter a number to limit the number of multicast data sources (1-24) a multicast group is
allowed to have.
Note: The setting only works for IGMPv3 and MLDv2.
Maximum
Multicast Group
Members
Enter a number to limit the number of multicast members a multicast group can have.
Fast Leave
Enable
Select this option to set the Device to remove a port from the multicast tree immediately
(without sending an IGMP or MLD membership query message) once it receives an IGMP or
MLD leave message. This is helpful if a user wants to quickly change a TV channel (multicast
group change) especially for IPTV applications.
LAN to LAN
(Intra LAN)
Multicast
Enable
Select this to enable LAN to LAN IGMP snooping capability.
Membership
Join Immediate
(IPTV)
Select this to have the Device add a host to a multicast group immediately once the Device
receives an IGMP or MLD join message.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 70 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
189
CHAPTER 14
Vlan Group
14.1 Overview
Virtual LAN IDs are used to identify different traffic types over the same physical link.
In the following example, the Device (DSL) can use VLAN IDs (VID) 100 and 200 to identify Video-
on-Demand and IPTV traffic respectively coming from the two VoD and IPTV multicast servers. The
Device (DSL) can also tag outgoing requests to these servers with these VLAN IDs.
Figure 96 VLAN Group Example
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
Use these screens to group separate VLAN groups together to be treated as one VLAN group.
14.2 The Vlan Group Screen
Click Network Setting > Vlan Group to open the following screen.
Figure 97 Network Setting > Vlan Group
Chapter 14 Vlan Group
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
190
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group
Click the Add New VLAN Group button in the Vlan Group screen to open the following screen.
Use this screen to create a new VLAN group.
Figure 98 Add/Edit VLAN Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 71 Network Setting > Vlan Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Vlan
Group
Click this button to create a new VLAN group.
# This is the index number of the VLAN group.
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the VLAN group.
VLAN ID This shows the unique ID number that identifies the VLAN group.
Interfaces This shows the LAN ports included in the VLAN group and if traffic leaving the port will be
tagged with the VLAN ID.
Modify Click the Edit icon to change an existing VLAN group setting or click the Delete icon to
remove the VLAN group.
Table 72 Add/Edit VLAN Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Group
Name
Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
VLAN ID Enter a unique ID number, from 1 to 4,094, to identify this VLAN group. Outgoing traffic is
tagged with this ID if Tx tagging is selected below.
LAN Select Include to add the associated LAN interface to this VLAN group.
Select Tx tagging to tag outgoing traffic from the associated LAN port with the VLAN ID
number entered above.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
191
CHAPTER 15
Interface Group
15.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate
with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different
domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets
devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface
group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 15.2 on
page 191).
15.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device
automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an
interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface
group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to
the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses
based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and
configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page
125 for more information.
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT
5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses
the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
Chapter 15 Interface Group
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
192
Figure 99 Interface Grouping Application
Click Network Setting > Interface Group to open the following screen.
Figure 100 Network Setting > Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
Table 73 Network Setting > Interface Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New
Interface Group
Click this button to create a new interface group.
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group.
Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the group.
Add Click this button to create a new group.
Default: ETH 2~4
Internet
192.168.1.x/24
192.168.2.x/24
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
eth10.0
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Chapter 15 Interface Group
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
193
Figure 101 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 74 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
WAN Interface
used in the
grouping
Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to
one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface.
Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available
LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces
list to add the interfaces to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the
right-facing arrow.
Automatically
Add Clients
With the
following DHCP
Vendor IDs
Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of
the hardware or firmware. See Section 15.2.2 on page 194 for more information.
# This shows the index number of the rule.
Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received
will belong to this group automatically.
Chapter 15 Interface Group
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
194
15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria
Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following
screen.
Figure 102 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
WildCard
Support
This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the Device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 74 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Address
Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
DHCP Option
60
Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic,
such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Enable
wildcard on
DHCP
option 60
option
Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for
DHCP option 60.
DHCP Option
61
Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN
connection index number.
Chapter 15 Interface Group
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
195
DUID type Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware
type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the
vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s hardware type
and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.
Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.
DHCP Option
125
Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.
Enterprise
Number
Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority).
Manufactur
er OUI
Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes
of the MAC address.
Product
Class
Enter the product class of the device.
Model
Name
Enter the model name of the device.
Serial
Number
Enter the serial number of the device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
196
CHAPTER 16
USB Service
16.1 Overview
You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on
your network.
The following figure is an overview of the Device’s file server feature. Computers A and B can
access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device.
Figure 103 File Sharing Overview
The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions
set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network
administrator.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 16.1.3 on page 198).
•Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 16.3 on
page 200).
•Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server (Section 16.4 on page 201).
16.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
A
B
C
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
197
16.1.2.1 About File Sharing
Workgroup name
This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources
such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a
network.
Shares
When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called
a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each
partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the
USB device.
File Systems
A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often
different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing
feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32.
Common Internet File System
The Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS
compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS
protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to
your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility).
16.1.2.2 About Printer Server
Print Server
This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs
to each printer from the computer itself or other devices.
Operating System
An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples
are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux.
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that
most of the Internet runs on.
Port
A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a
process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the
port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for.
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
198
Supported OSs
Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port
9100) protocol.
The following OSs support Device’s printer sharing feature.
• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X.
16.1.3 Before You Begin
Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on.
1 Connect the USB device to one of the Device’s USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your
network.
2 The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are
connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected
to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for
suggestions.
16.2 The File Sharing Screen
Use this screen to set up file sharing through the Device. The Device’s LAN users can access the
shared folder (or share) from the USB device inserted in the Device. To access this screen, click
Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing.
Figure 104 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
199
Each field is described in the following table.
16.2.1 The Add New User Screen
Use this screen to create a user account that can access the secured shares on the USB device. To
access this screen, click the Add New User button in the Network Setting > USB Service > File
Sharing screen.
Table 76 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Information
Volume This is the volume name the Device gives to an inserted USB device.
Capacity This is the total available memory size (in megabytes) on the USB device.
Used Space This is the memory size (in megabytes) already used on the USB device.
Server Configuration
File Sharing
Services
Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device.
Host Name Enter the host name on the share.
Share Directory List
Add New Share
Click this to create a new share for users to access through the Device.
Active Select this to activate the share.
Status This field shows the status of the share.
: The share is not activated.
: The share is activated and shared to all users.
: The share is activated and only shared to the specified users listed in the Account
Management section below.
Share Name
This field shows the name of a folder that is shared through the Device.
Share Path This field shows the location of the share in the Device.
Share
Description
This field shows a short description of the share.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to modify the share.
Click the Delete icon to remove the share from the Device.
Account Management
Add New User
Click this button to create a user account to access the secured shares.
Active Select this to allow the user to access the secured shares.
Status
This field shows the status of the user.
: The user account is not activated for the share.
: The user account is activated for the share.
User Name
This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device.
Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the user account.
Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the Device.
Apply
Click this to save your changes to the Device.
Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
200
Figure 105 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user
Each field is described in the following table.
16.3 The Media Server Screen
The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB
storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The
Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant
media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of
personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home
network.
The Device media server enables you to:
• Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the
Device.
• Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files.
Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user
name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled
by default with the video, photo, and music shares published.
To change your Device’s media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media
Server. The screen appears as shown.
Table 77 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter a user name. You can enter up to 16 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed.
New Password Enter the password used to access the secured share. The password must be 5 to 15
characters long. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive.
Retype New
Password
Retype the password that you entered above.
Apply
Click this to save your changes to the Device.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
201
Figure 106 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
16.4 Print Server
The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB
printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers
connected to your network.
16.4.1 Before You Begin
To configure the print server you need the following:
• Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The
USB printer must be connected to your Device.
• A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer.
• The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can
create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions
on how to install the printer software on your computer.
Note: Your printer’s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your
computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead.
Table 78 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Media Server Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server.
Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media
files located in the shares.
Interface Select an interface on which you want to enable the media server function.
Media Library
Path
Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to
the Device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 16 USB Service
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
202
16.4.2 The Print Server Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device.
To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server.
Figure 107 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 79 Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Print Server Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
203
CHAPTER 17
Power Management
17.1 Overview
Power management allows you to turn on/off one or more interfaces and all LED lights without
power off the whole system when necessary. You can configure a schedule to do so automatically or
manually do it on the Web Configurator.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the Power Management screen to manually turn on/off interface(s) and/or LEDs (Section
17.2 on page 203).
•Use the Auto Switch Off screen to configure schedules for turning on/off interface(s) and/or
LEDs automatically (Section 17.3 on page 204).
17.1.2 What You Need To Know
•The Power Management and Auto Switch Off screens are dependant. You can only configure
the on/off switches of the same interface and LEDs in one of the two screens.
17.2 The Power Management Screen
Use this screen to manually turn on/off interface(s) or LEDs. Click Network Setting > Power
Management > Power Management. The screen appears as shown.
Chapter 17 Power Management
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
204
Figure 108 Network Setting > Power Management
Each field is described in the following table.
17.3 The Auto Switch Off Screen
Use this screen to view schedules to turn on or off specific interface(s) and/or all LED lights on the
Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > Power Management > Auto Switch Off.
Figure 109 Network Setting > Power Managment > Auto Switch Off
Table 80 Network Setting > Power Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Manually
Switch On/Off
Select POWER ON or POWER OFF to turn on/off the interface or LED lights.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 17 Power Management
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
205
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
17.3.1 The Auto Switch Off Add or Modify Screen
Use this screen to manage the auto switch off schedules. To access this screen, click the Add or
modify rules link in the Network Setting > Power Management > Auto Switch Off screen.
Figure 110 Network Setting > Power Managment > Auto Switch Off > Add or modify rules
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 81 Network Setting > Power Managment > Auto Switch OffNetwork Setting > Power
Managment > Auto Switch Off
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add or modify
rules
Click this link to create or edit a schedule.
# This is the index number of a schedule rule.
Rule Name This field shows the name of the schedule rule.
Day This field shows which week days (in green) the interface(s) and/or LEDs are turned on and
the days (grayed-out) they are turned off automatically.
Time This field shows the time period the interface(s) and/or LEDs are turned on.
Wireless This field shows whether this schedule applies to the wireless LAN interface.
DSL WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the DSL WAN interface.
Eth WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the Ethernet WAN interface.
LAN1~LAN4 This field shows whether this schedule applies to the corresponding LAN interface.
LED This field shows whether this schedule applies to the LEDs.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 82 Network Setting > Power Managment > Auto Switch Off Network Setting > Power
Managment > Auto Switch Off > Add or modify rules
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this link to create a rule.
# This is the index number of a rule.
Rule Name This field shows the name of the rule.
Day This field shows the week days of the schedule (in green).
Time This field shows the time period of the schedule.
Description This field shows more information about this rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the rule or click the Delete icon to remove it.
Chapter 17 Power Management
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
206
17.3.2 The Add/Edit Rule Screen
Use this screen to configure a schedule rule. To access this screen, click the Add new rule link or
the Edit icon in the Network Setting > Power Management > Auto Switch Off > Add or
modify rules screen.
Figure 111 Network Setting > Power Management > Auto Switch Off > Add or modify rules > Add
new rule/Edit
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 83 Network Setting > Power Management > Auto Switch Off > Add or modify rules > Add
new rule/Edit>
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rule Name Type up to 31 alphanumberic characters for the name of this rule.
Day Select the week day(s) of the schedule.
Time of Day
Range
Enter the From and To times (in hh:mm format) to set a time period for the schedule. You
can only enter a time period between 00:00 and 23:59.
To set a time period crossing over midnight, you must split the time period into two
schedule rules. For example, for a time period from 10:00 PM to the next day’s 8:00 AM,
you can set one schedule for 22:00~23:59 and another schedule for 00:00~08:00.
Description Enter more information for this rule here.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
207
CHAPTER 18
Firewall
18.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device’s security settings. Use the firewall
to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to
it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 112 Default Firewall Action
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 18.2
on page 208).
•Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall
rules (Section 18.3 on page 209).
•Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section
18.4 on page 212).
•Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 18.5
on page 214).
WAN
LAN
3
4
1
2
A
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
208
18.1.2 What You Need to Know
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-
ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart
all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby
causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of
the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making
the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
18.2 The Firewall Screen
Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped
based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
209
Figure 113 Security > Firewall > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.3 The Protocol Screen
You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. See Appendix D on page 314 for some examples.
Click Security > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen.
Table 84 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the Device.
Easy Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Medium Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
High Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
210
Figure 114 Security > Firewall > Protocol
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.3.1 Add/Edit a Service
Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule
configuration. Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the
Service screen to display the following screen.
Table 85 Security > Firewall > Protocol
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new
service entry
Click this to add a new service.
Name This is the name of your customized service.
Description This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/Protocol
Number
This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range
of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the
service uses another IP protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
211
Figure 115 Service: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 86 Service: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Protocol Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from
the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number.
Source/
Destination Port
These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port.
Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your
customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports.
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Protocol
Number
This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol.
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.
Rule List
Protocol This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port.
Ports/Protocol
Number
For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that
defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number.
Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the rule.
Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for
your customized port.
Service
Description
Enter a description for your customized port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
212
18.4 The Access Control Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a
list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 116 Security > Firewall > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
18.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control
screen. The following screen displays.
Table 87 Security > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new ACL
rule
Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This displays the name of the rule.
Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank
source address is equivalent to Any.
Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a
blank destination address is equivalent to Any.
Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic
to which this rule applies.
Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and
sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender
(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one
when you take this action.
Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
213
Figure 117 Access Control: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 Access Control: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces,
underscores, and dashes.
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing
the ACL rule.
Order Select the order of the ACL rule.
Select Source
Device
Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address,
enter the source IP address in the field below.
Source IP
Address
Enter the source IP address.
Select
Destination
Device
Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP
Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Destination IP
Address
Enter the destination IP address.
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down
list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service >
Add screen display in this list.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service.
Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box.
Custom Source
Port
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
214
18.5 The DoS Screen
DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and
connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access
becomes unavailable.
Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS
to display the following screen.
Figure 118 Security > Firewall > DoS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Custom
Destination Port
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Policy Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP
destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of
(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Enable Rate
Limit
Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the
specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a
new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler
Rules screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 88 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 89 Security > Firewall > DoS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection
Blocking
Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Deny Ping
Response
Select Enable to block ping request packets.
Chapter 18 Firewall
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
215
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 89 Security > Firewall > DoS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
216
CHAPTER 19
MAC Filter
19.1 Overview
You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC
Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
19.2 The MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Security > MAC Filter.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 119 Security > MAC Filter
Chapter 19 MAC Filter
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
217
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 90 Security > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function.
MAC Restrict Mode Select Allow to only permit the listed MAC addresses access to the Device. Select Deny
to permit anyone access to the Device except the listed MAC addresses.
Set This is the index number of the MAC address.
Allow Select Allow to enable the MAC filter rule. . The rule will not be applied if Allow is not
selected.
Host name Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device.
MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format,
that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
218
CHAPTER 20
Parental Control
20.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time
periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user.
20.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.
Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 120 Security > Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 91 Security > Parental Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Parental
Control
Select Enable to activate parental control.
Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new Parental Control Profile (PCP).
# This shows the index number of the rule.
Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Chapter 20 Parental Control
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
219
20.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile
Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to
an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL
filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
PCP Name This shows the name of the rule.
Home Network
User (MAC)
This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.
Internet Access
Schedule
This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.
Network
Service
This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 91 Security > Parental Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 20 Parental Control
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
220
Figure 121 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule
Figure 122 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Service
Chapter 20 Parental Control
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
221
Figure 123 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Keyword
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 92 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.
Parental
Control Profile
Name
Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Home Network
User
Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you
select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all
LAN users.
Rule List In Home Network User, select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address, then click the
+ sign to enter a computer MAC address for this PCP. Up to five are allowed. Click the - sign
to remove one.
Internet Access Schedule
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control.
Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access (Authorized
access) or denied access (No access). Click the + sign above the time bar to add a new
time bar. Up to three are allowed.
Authorized
access
Select this to allow access for the times defined above.
No access Select this to deny access for the times defined above.
Network Service
Network
Service Setting
If you select Block, the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs
listed below.
If you select Allow, the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below.
Add new
service
Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the
Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule.
# This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it.
Service Name This shows the name of the rule.
Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule.
Chapter 20 Parental Control
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
222
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Blocked Site/
URL Keyword
Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device
blocks access. Click Delete to remove it.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 92 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
223
CHAPTER 21
Scheduler Rule
21.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain
features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen.
21.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen
Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Security > Scheduler Rule to open the following screen.
Figure 124 Security > Scheduler Rule
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 93 Security > Scheduler Rule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Rule Name This shows the name of the rule.
Day This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
Description This shows the description of this rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
Chapter 21 Scheduler Rule
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
224
21.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to
open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule.
Figure 125 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 94 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rule Name Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this
schedule.
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule.
Time if Day
Range
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced.
Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
225
CHAPTER 22
Certificates
22.1 Overview
The Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based
on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.
Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's
CA-signed certificates (Section 22.4 on page 228).
•The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 22.4
on page 228).
22.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device
to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send
the certification requests to a certification authority.
22.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the Device’s summary
list of certificates and certification requests.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
226
Figure 126 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to
open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request.
Table 95 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Private Key is
protected by a
password
Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device.
The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Browse... Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification
authority from your computer to the Device.
Create Certificate
Request
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a
certification request.
Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you
give each certificate a unique name.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in
red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become
applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has
already expired.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate.
Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
227
Figure 127 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate
request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the
signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen.
Figure 128 Certificate Request Created
Table 96 Create Certificate Request
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Common Name Select Auto to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to
enter it manually.
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The
domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization
Name
Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner
belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name
Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is
located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name
Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
228
22.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local
Certificates screen click the certificate request’s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate
into the Device.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 129 Load Signed Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a
summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as
trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as
being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these
certification authorities.
Table 97 Load Signed Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name
This is the name of the signed certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
229
Figure 130 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
22.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
Table 98 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Import
Certificate
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
authority that you trust to the Device.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and
Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
230
Figure 131 Trusted CA: View
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
22.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The
Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
Table 99 Trusted CA: View
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM
uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you
can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management
computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 22 Certificates
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
231
Figure 132 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 100 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate File
Path
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to
find it.
Enable Trusted
CA for 802.1x
Authentication
If you select this checkbox, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The
selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x:
Edit screen.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
232
CHAPTER 23
Log
23.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail)
or to a syslog server.
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 23.2 on page 233).
•Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select
(Section 23.3 on page 234).
23.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System
Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 101 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Chapter 23 Log
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
233
23.2 The System Log Screen
Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the
System Log screen.
Figure 133 System Monitor > Log > System Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Table 101 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
Table 102 System Monitor > Log > System Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
System Log
# This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 23 Log
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
234
23.3 The Security Log Screen
Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select.
Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen.
Figure 134 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 103 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
# This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
235
CHAPTER 24
Traffic Status
24.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN
interfaces and NAT.
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 24.2 on page 235).
•Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 24.3 on page 236).
•Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the Device’s client(s) (Section 24.4 on page 237)
24.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows
the number of bytes received and sent on the Device.
Figure 135 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
Chapter 24 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
236
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
24.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device.
Table 104 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Connected
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
Packets Sent
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
more...hide
more
Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them.
Disabled
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
Packets Sent
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 24 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
237
Figure 136 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
24.4 The NAT Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the NAT session statistics for hosts currently connected on the Device.
Table 105 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
more...hide
more
Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them.
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interfaces.
Sent (Packets)
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Received (Packets)
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 24 Traffic Status
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
238
Figure 137 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 106 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Device Name This displays the name of the connected host.
IP Address This displays the IP address of the connected host.
MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host.
No. of Open
Session
This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected
host.
Total This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the Device can support is currently
being used by all connected hosts.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
239
CHAPTER 25
ARP Table
25.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
25.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device,
the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target
MA C f i e l d ( F F. F F.F F. F F. F F. F F is t h e E t he r n e t b r o a d ca s t address). The replying device (which is either
the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast
address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer
directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then
sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
Chapter 25 ARP Table
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
240
25.2 ARP Table Screen
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System
Monitor > ARP Table.
Figure 138 System Monitor > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 107 System Monitor > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the ARP table entry number.
IPv4/IPv6
Address
This is the learned IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of a device connected to a port.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its
configuration screen.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
241
CHAPTER 26
Routing Table
26.1 Overview
Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward
a packet.
26.2 The Routing Table Screen
Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen.
Figure 139 System Monitor > Routing Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 108 System Monitor > Routing Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4/IPv6 Routing Table
Destination This indicates the destination IPv4 address or IPv6 address and prefix of this route.
Gateway This indicates the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward this
route’s traffic.
Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of the IPv4 route.
Chapter 26 Routing Table
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
242
Flag This indicates the route status.
U-Up: The route is up.
!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
H-Host: The target of the route is a host.
R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect.
M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect.
Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for
transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower
the "cost".
Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded.
brx indicates a LAN interface where x can be 0~3 to represent LAN1 to LAN4 respectively.
ptm0 indicates a WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
ppp0 indicates a WAN interface using PPPoE.
Table 108 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
243
CHAPTER 27
IGMP/MLD Status
27.1 Overview
Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP/MLD group status and traffic statistics.
27.2 The IGMP/MLD Group Status Screen
Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports
have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP/MLD Group Status.
Figure 140 System Monitor > IGMP/MLD Group Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 109 System Monitor > IGMP/MLD Group Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP or MLD
multicast group.
Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP or MLD multicast group to which the interface
belongs.
Chapter 27 IGMP/MLD Status
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
244
Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast
group’s traffic.
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast
group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
Table 109 System Monitor > IGMP/MLD Group Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
245
CHAPTER 28
xDSL Statistics
28.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen
Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open
the following screen.
Figure 141 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
Chapter 28 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
246
Chapter 28 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
247
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 110 Status > xDSL Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.
Line Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.
xDSL Training
Status
This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.
Mode This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.
Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if
the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.
Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was
started.
xDSL Port Details
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.
Actual Net Data
Rate
These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without
transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and
receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce
throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-
carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power.
The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could
increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.
Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that
determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then
transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon)
is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the
data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm).
Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider.
Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port.
Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream
is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.
Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and
result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as
voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of
errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-
Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and
downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it
causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia
data.
Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This
attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power
received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge,
quality, condition and length of the physical line).
Attainable Net
Data Rate
These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and
receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
xDSL Counters
Chapter 28 xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
248
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
FEC This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.
CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least
one errored block or at least one defect.
SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing
30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES.
UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.
LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.
LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.
LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.
Table 110 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
249
CHAPTER 29
3G Statistics
29.1 Overview
Use the 3G Statistics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status.
29.2 The 3G Statistics Screen
To open this screen, click System Monitor > 3G Statistics. The 3G status is available on this
screen only when you insert a compatible 3G dongle in a USB port on the Device.
Figure 142 System Monitor > 3G Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 111 System Monitor > 3G Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Interval
Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop
refreshing.
3G Status This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection. This field can display:
GSM - Global System for Mobile Communications, 2G
GPRS - General Packet Radio Service, 2.5G
EDGE - Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution, 2.75G
WCDMA - Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, 3G
HSDPA - High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, 3.5G
HSUPA - High-Speed Uplink Packet Access, 3.75G
HSPA - HSDPA+HSUPA, 3.75G
Service
Provider
This field displays the name of the service provider.
Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm.
Chapter 29 3G Statistics
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
250
Connection
Uptime
This field displays the time the connection has been up.
3G Card
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card.
3G Card Model This field displays the model name of the 3G card.
3G Card F/W
Version
This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card.
SIM Card IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number
associated with all cellular networks. This number is provisioned in the SIM card.
Table 111 System Monitor > 3G Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
251
CHAPTER 30
User Account
30.1 Overview
A user account is the In the Users Account screen, you can change the password of the “admin”
user account that you used to log in the Device.
30.2 The User Account Screen
Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen.
Figure 143 Maintenance > User Account
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 112 Maintenance > User Account
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number
User Name This field displays the name of the account used to log into the Device web configurator.
Retry Times This field displays the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this
account. 0 means there is no limit.
Idle Timeout This field displays the the length of inactive time before the Device will automatically log the
user out of the web configurator.
Lock Period This field displays the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after
a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times.
Group This field displays whether this user has Administrator or User privleges.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove the entry.
Chapter 30 User Account
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
252
30.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen
Click Add new user or the Edit icom of an existign account in the Maintenance > User Account to
open the following screen.
Figure 144 Maintenance > User Account >Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Table 112 Maintenance > User Account (continued) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 113 Maintenance > User Account
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter a new name for the This field displays the name of an existing account.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password used to access the Device web
configurator.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the Device.
Verify Password Type the new password again for confirmation.
Retry Times Enter the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0
means there is no limit.
Idle Timeout Enter the length of inactive time before the Device will automatically log the user out of the
web configurator.
Lock Period Enter the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if
consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times.
Group Specify whether this user will have Administrator or User privleges.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
253
CHAPTER 31
Remote Management
31.1 Overview
Remote management controls through which interface(s), which services can access the Device.
Note: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator.
31.2 The Remote MGMT Screen
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s), which services can access the Device. You
can also specify the port numbers the services must use to connect to the Device. Click
Maintenance > Remote MGMT to open the following screen.
Figure 145 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
Chapter 31 Remote Management
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
254
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 114 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface
used for
services
Select Any WAN to have the Device automatically activate the remote management service
when any WAN connection is up.
Select Multi WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the Device
activate the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up.
HTTP This is the service you may use to access the Device.
LAN/WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the LAN/WLAN.
WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from all WAN connections.
Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Certificate
HTTPS
Certificate
Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS
client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
255
CHAPTER 32
TR-069 Client
32.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-069 auto-configuration settings.
32.2 The TR-069 Client Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed
over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote
Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup
Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware
upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed
by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
Click Maintenance > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure
your Device to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 146 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
Chapter 32 TR-069 Client
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
256
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 115 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inform Select Enable for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise,
select Disable.
Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the auto-
configuration server.
ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Any_WAN, the Device automatically passes the TR-069 traffic when any WAN
connection is up.
If you select Multi_WAN, you also need to select two or more pre-configured WAN
interfaces. The Device automatically passes the TR-069 traffic when one of the selected WAN
connections is up.
Display SOAP
messages on
serial console
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to
authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the connection request password.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to
authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request URL
This shows the connection request URL.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device.
Local certificate
used by TR-069
client
You can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be
imported in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
257
CHAPTER 33
TR-064
33.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-064 auto-configuration settings.
33.2 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on
top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their
computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the
username and password.
Click Maintenance > TR-064 to open the following screen.
Figure 147 Maintenance > TR-064
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 116 Maintenance > TR-064
LABEL DESCRIPTION
State Select Enable to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
258
CHAPTER 34
SNMP
34.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the SNMP settings on the Device.
34.2 The SNMP Screen
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager
station to manage and monitor the Device through the network. The Device supports SNMP version
one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management
operation.
Figure 148 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Device). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
Chapter 34 SNMP
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
259
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an
agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Click Maintenance > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the Device
SNMP settings.
Figure 149 Maintenance > SNMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 117 Maintenance > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Agent Select Enable to let the Device act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station
to manage and monitor the Device through the network. Select Disable to turn this
feature off.
Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext
requests from the management station.
Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station.
System Name Enter the SNMP system name.
System Location Enter the SNMP system location.
System Contact Enter the SNMP system contact.
Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
260
CHAPTER 35
Time Settings
35.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
35.2 The Time Screen
To change your Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown.
Use this screen to configure the Device’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 150 Maintenance > Time
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 118 Maintenance > Time
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
Current Time This field displays the time of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server.
Chapter 35 Time Settings
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
261
Current Date This field displays the date of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server.
NTP Time Server
First ~ Fifth NTP
time server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII
characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone
Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set
their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
State Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start rule: Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday
and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday,
and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Table 118 Maintenance > Time (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
262
CHAPTER 36
E-mail Notification
36.1 Overview
A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and
deliver e-mail messages.
To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server
and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver.
36.2 The Email Notification Screen
Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen
to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device.
Figure 151 Maintenance > Email Notification
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 119 Maintenance > Email Notification
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Email Click this button to create a new entry.
Mail Server
Address
This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server.
Username This field displays the user name of the sender’s mail account.
Password This field displays the password of the sender’s mail account.
Email Address This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-
mail that the Device sends.
Delete Click this button to delete the selected entry(ies).
Chapter 36 E-mail Notification
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
263
36.2.1 Email Notification Edit
Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required
information for sending e-mail via a mail server.
Figure 152 Email Notification > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 120 Email Notification > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mail Server
Address
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified
in the Account Email Address field.
If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
Authentication
Username
Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account
you specified in the Account Email Address field.
Authentication
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Account Email
Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail
notification that the Device sends.
If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated
by the mail server as well.
Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
264
CHAPTER 37
Log Setting
37.1 Overview
You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device
records in the Logs Setting screen.
37.2 The Log Settings Screen
To change your Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 153 Maintenance > Logs Setting
Chapter 37 Log Setting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
265
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
37.2.1 Example E-mail Log
An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The
following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.
• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
Table 121 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Setting
Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging.
Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local
File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog
server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote.
Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories
of logs.
UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses
specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
System Log
Mail Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Security Log
Mail Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Send Log to The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
the Device does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack,
system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the
alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to
blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Allowed
Capacity Before
Email
Set what percent of the Device’s log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a
log e-mail.
Clear log after
sending mail
Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs.
Active Log and Alert
System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
Send
immediate alert
Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 37 Log Setting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
266
•"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
Figure 154 E-mail Log Example
Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
user@zyxel.com
To:
user@zyxel.com
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
End of Firewall Log
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
267
CHAPTER 38
Firmware Upgrade
38.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware
releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s
performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
38.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 155 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen. After you see the firmware updating screen,
wait two minutes before logging into the Device again.
Chapter 38 Firmware Upgrade
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
268
Figure 156 Firmware Uploading
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 157 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Firmware Upgrade screen.
Table 122 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Upgrade
Firmware
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Upgrade 3G
Package
Current 3G
Package
Version
This is the present 3G Package version and the date created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Chapter 38 Firmware Upgrade
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
269
Figure 158 Error Message
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
270
CHAPTER 39
Configuration
39.1 Overview
The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
39.2 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 159 Maintenance > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Device’s current configuration to a file on
your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended
that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup
configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the Device’s current configuration to your computer.
Chapter 39 Configuration
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
271
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your Device.
Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again
to restart the Device.
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 160 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1).
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Figure 161 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to
its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Table 123 Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process.
Chapter 39 Configuration
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
272
Figure 162 Reset Warning Message
Figure 163 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device.
Refer to Section 1.6 on page 21 for more information on the RESET button.
39.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may
need to do this if the Device hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the
Device's configuration.
Figure 164 Maintenance > Reboot
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
273
CHAPTER 40
Diagnostic
40.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by
independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts
subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE
802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network
administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the
path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
40.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route
packets take to a host (Section 40.3 on page 274).
•The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 40.5 on page 275).
•The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)
packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 40.5 on page 275).
40.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports
on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send
Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’
CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target
after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a
connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where
the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault.
Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to
the line connectivity status report.
Chapter 40 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
274
40.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >
Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup to open the screen shown next.
Figure 165 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping &TraceRoute&NsLookup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
40.4 802.1ag
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to
perform CFM actions.
Table 124 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
URL or IP
Address
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in
order to test a connection.
Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet
takes to the specified computer.
Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
Chapter 40 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
275
Figure 166 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
40.5 OAM Ping
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to
perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The
Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the
Device. The test result then displays in the text box.
Table 125 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Destination
MAC Address
Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test.
802.1Q VLAN
ID
Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
VDSL Traffic
Type
This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated.
Loopback
Message (LBM)
This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or
outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.
Linktrace
Message (LTM)
This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).
Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level.
Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified
remote end point.
Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a
specified remote end point.
Chapter 40 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
276
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual
circuits is as follows:
Figure 167 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and
wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual
circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC)
level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different
predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC
connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in
the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)
• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL
devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC
segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM
link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest
neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end
PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5
to use this test.
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
• Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices
• Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels
• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Chapter 40 Diagnostic
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
277
Figure 168 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 126 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
278
CHAPTER 41
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• Device Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Wireless Internet Access
• USB Device Connection
• UPnP
41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1 Make sure the Device is turned on.
2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device.
3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4 Turn the Device off and on.
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 20.
2 Check the hardware connections.
3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4 Turn the Device off and on.
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
279
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
41.2 Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Device.
1 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by
looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default
Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP
address in your Internet browser.
3 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
21.
I forgot the password.
1 See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords.
2 If those do not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
21.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 127), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Device.
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
1.5 on page 20.
3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4 If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and
HTTPS (Maintenance > Remote MGMT).
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
280
5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address.
See Section 1.6 on page 21.
6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account
even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device,
check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not
respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device.
1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. See the cover page for the default login names
and associated passwords. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log
out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
3 Turn the Device off and on.
4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 41.1 on page
278.
I cannot Telnet to the Device.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
281
41.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.
2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting >
Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in
the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same
as the settings in the Device.
4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them.
5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack
on a splitter if you have one).
2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen)
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
3 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL
connection (Network Setting > Interface Group).
4 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL
connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot connect to the Internet using an Ethernet connection.
1 The DSL connection has priority. If the DSL connection is up, then the Ethernet connection will be
down.
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
282
2 Make sure you have the Ethernet WAN port connected to a MODEM or Router.
3 Make sure you converted LAN port number four as WAN. Click Enable in Network Setting >
Broadband > Ethernet WAN screen.
4 Make sure you configured a proper EthernetWAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband
screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
5 Check that the WAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet
connection (Network Setting > Interface Group).
6 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a 3G connection.
1 The DSL and Ethernet connections have priority in that order. If the DSL or Ethernet connection is
up, then the 3G connection will be down.
2 Make sure you have connected a compatible 3G dongle to the USB port.
3 Make sure you have configured Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup correctly.
Check that the Device is within range of a 3G base station.I cannot access the Device anymore. I
had access to the Device, but my connection is not available anymore.
1 Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again.
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.
3 Turn the Device off and on.
4 If the problem continues, contact your vendor.
41.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
283
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?
An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a
wireless network must use the same SSID.
41.5 USB Device Connection
The Device fails to detect my USB device.
1 Disconnect the USB device.
2 Reboot the Device.
3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is
connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
4 Re-connect your USB device to the Device.
41.6 UPnP
When using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My
Network Places > Local Network.
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
284
1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device’s LAN port or from your computer.
2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable.
The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.
Restart your computer.
285
PART III
Appendices
Appendices contain general information. Some information may not apply to your device.
286
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
287
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
•ZyXEL Kazakhstan
Appendix A Customer Support
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
288
• http://www.zyxel.kz
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Appendix A Customer Support
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
289
Belarus
•ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
•ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
•ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
•ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
Appendix A Customer Support
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
290
Italy
• ZyXEL Communications Italy
• http://www.zyxel.it/
Latvia
•ZyXEL Latvia
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
•ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
•ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
• ZyXEL Communications ES Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
• ZyXEL Communications
Appendix A Customer Support
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
291
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Turkey
•ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
•ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Brazil
• ZyXEL Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Ecuador
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Israel
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
Appendix A Customer Support
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
292
• http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
293
APPENDIX B
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 169 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
294
Figure 170 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
295
Figure 171 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
296
Figure 172 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
297
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your Device.
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
Table 127 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Table 128 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
SECURITY TYPE
Least
Secure
Most Secure
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
298
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
•Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
299
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-
side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
300
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
Table 129 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
301
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
302
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
1 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
303
Figure 173 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
2 The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 174 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
304
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) is needed to
communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
Table 130 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open None No Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
WPA2 TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
Appendix B Wireless LANs
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
305
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
306
APPENDIX C
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 10
38
IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 131 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
307
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 132 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 133 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
308
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Table 133 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 :12 : 34 :56
EUI-64 02 :13 :49
: FF : FE :12 : 34 :56
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
309
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
T1
T2
Renew
Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
310
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Device
receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the
neighbor cache. When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and
receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the
router can be used as a default router.
When the Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the
next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Device uses the prefix list to
determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the
Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP
address is known, the Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends
the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache
or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps
reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
311
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2 After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
3 Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
312
5 Click Start and then OK.
6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3 Click OK to save the change.
Appendix C IPv6
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
313
4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5 Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
314
APPENDIX D
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
Appendix D Services
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
315
Table 134 Examples of Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling
protocol uses this service.
AIM TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from White
Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches web
names (for instance www.zyxel.com
) to IP
numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that
can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast
transfer of files, including large files that may not
be possible by e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server
protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-
commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for
diagnostic purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for
key distribution and management.
IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-
mail.
IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs
over SSL.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this
protocol.
NetBIOS TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
137
138
139
445
The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for
communication between computers in a LAN.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
Appendix D Services
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
316
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server
distributed file service that provides transparent file
sharing for network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery
mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out
ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote
host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer
get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs
over SSL.
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure
transfer of data over public networks. This is the
control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables
secure transfer of data over public networks. This is
the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time
sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for
cable modems.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol
(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of
transferring files between computers.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-
exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables
you to move messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs
over SSL.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to
access data on many different types of database
systems, including mainframes, midrange systems,
UNIX systems and network servers.
SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
Table 134 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix D Services
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
317
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX
server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol
common on the Internet and in UNIX
environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks.
Its primary function is to allow users to log into
remote host systems.
VDOLIVE TCP
UDP
7000
user-
defined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number
is specified in the application.
Table 134 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
318
APPENDIX E
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2015 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
UNITED STATE AMERICA
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
FCC EMC Statement
• The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
•Increase the separation between the equipment or devices
•Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s
•Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
CANADA
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 statement
• This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device
may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
319
• This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum
permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a
gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
• If you use the produce with 5G wireless function, the following attention shall be paid that,
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems;
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
• Le présent émetteur radio de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorieI) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner
avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type
d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement
interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
• Si vous utilisez le produit avec 5G sans fil fonction, suivant l'attention doit être versée que,
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les
risques de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;
Industry Canada Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
EUROPEAN UNION
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 1999/
5/EC (R&TTE)
Български
(Bulgarian)
С настоящото ZyXEL декларира, че това оборудване е в съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите
приложими разпоредбите на Директива 1999/5/ЕC.
Español
(Spanish)
Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Čeština
(Czech)
ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/EC.
Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
(German)
Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
Eesti keel
(Estonian)
Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Ελληνικά
(Greek)
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ ZyXEL ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ εξοπλισμός ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ
ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕC.
English Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Français
(French)
Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
Hrvatski
(Croatian)
ZyXEL ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 1999/5/EC.
Íslenska
(Icelandic)
Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar
1999/5/EC.
Italiano
(Italian)
Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviešu valoda
(Latvian)
Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lietuvių kalba
(Lithuanian)
Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
320
National Restrictions
This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for
the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune
limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttiva 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna
limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der Richtlinie 1999/5/CE
folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless
local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements
or both are applicable.
The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their
national regulations for both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs.
The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulatory
Requirements for Wireless LANs”:.
Belgium
The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range
exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch
Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des
services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.
Denmark
In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.
I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
Italy
This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless
this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please
check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in
Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”.
Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latvia
The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details.
Magyar
(Hungarian)
Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK
irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li
hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands
(Dutch)
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
Polski (Polish) Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
(Portuguese)
ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/EC.
Română
(Romanian)
Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
Slovenčina
(Slovak)
ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.
Slovenščina
(Slovene)
ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/EC.
Suomi
(Finnish)
ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska
(Swedish)
Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Norsk
(Norwegian)
Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante
bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
321
2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://
www.esd.lv.
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in
those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding
the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
List of national codes
Safety Warnings
• DO NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• DO NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• DO NOT store things on the device.
• DO NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• DO NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
• DO NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting
it to a power outlet.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
• DO NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• DO NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• DO NOT use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and
electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• DO NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the equipment or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
• For PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the equipment;
• For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CZ Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Switzerland CH
Ireland IE Sweden SE
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
322
Environment Statement
ErP (Energy-related Products)
ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published
Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called
as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures,
power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
Network standby power consumption < 12W, and/or
Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or
Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.
Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail.
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
WEEE Directive
The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate
collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll
entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum
Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu
sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des
ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la
collecte séparée de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la
santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti
domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello
smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente
e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här
produkten når slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och
mänsklig hälsa genom att göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
323
Environmental Product Declaration
Appendix E Legal Information
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
324
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區
第十二條　經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條　低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
安全警告
為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
• 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :
－ 對永久連接之設備， 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
－ 對插接式之設備， 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under
those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it.
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
325
Index
A
ACL rule 212
ACS 255
activation
firewalls 208
media server 201
SIP ALG 175
SSID 100
adding a printer example 55
Address Resolution Protocol 239
administrator password 23
antenna
directional 305
gain 304
omni-directional 305
AP (access point) 295
applications
Internet access 18
media server 200
activation 201
iTunes server 200
applications, NAT 179
ARP Table 239, 241
authentication 113, 114
RADIUS server 114
Authentication method
CHAP 74
MSCHAP 74
PAP 74
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 255
B
backup
configuration 270
Basic Service Set, See BSS 293
Basic Service Set, see BSS
blinking LEDs 20
Broadband 66
broadcast 92
BSS 116, 293
example 116
C
CA 225, 299
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
CCMs 273
certificate
factory default 226
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certificates 225
authentication 225
CA
creating 226
public key 225
replacing 226
storage space 226
Certification Authority 225
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 320
viewing 324
CFI 92
CFM 273
CCMs 273
link trace test 273
loopback test 273
MA 273
MD 273
MEP 273
MIP 273
channel 295
interference 295
channel, wireless LAN 112
CHAP 74
client list 131
compatibility, WDS 106
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
326
configuration
backup 270
firewalls 208
reset 271
restoring 271
static route 87, 142, 144, 183
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
contact information 287
copyright 318
CoS 161
CoS technologies 149
creating certificates 226
CTS (Clear to Send) 296
CTS threshold 109, 113
customer support 287
D
data fragment threshold 109, 113
DDoS 208
default server address 174
Denials of Service, see DoS
DHCP 126, 138
DHCP Option 43 137
DHCP option 43 75, 136
DHCP option 60 75
DHCP option 61
DUID 75
IAD 75
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 161
DiffServ 161
marking rule 161
digital IDs 225
disclaimer 318
DLNA 200
DMZ 173
DNS 126, 138
DNS server address assignment 92
Domain Name 180
Domain Name System, see DNS
Domain Name System. See DNS.
DoS 208
DS field 161
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP 161
dynamic DNS 182
wildcard 182
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
dynamic WEP key exchange 300
DYNDNS wildcard 182
E
EAP Authentication 299
ECHO 180
e-mail
log example 265
Encapsulation 88
MER 89
PPP over Ethernet 89
encapsulation
RFC 1483 89
encryption 115, 301
ESS 294
Extended Service Set IDentification 96, 101
Extended Service Set, See ESS 294
F
Fast Leave 188
FCC interference statement 320
file sharing 19
filters
MAC address 102, 114
Finger 180
firewalls 207
add protocols 209
configuration 208
DDoS 208
DoS 208
LAND attack 208
Ping of Death 208
SYN attack 208
firmware 267
version 63
forwarding ports 166
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
327
fragmentation threshold 109, 113, 296
FTP 166, 180
G
General wireless LAN screen 95
H
hidden node 295
HTTP 180
I
IBSS 293
ICMPv6 186
IEEE 802.11g 297
IEEE 802.1Q 92
IGA 178
IGMP 92
multicast group list 186, 243
version 92
IGMP Fast Leave 186
IGMPv2 186
IGMPv3 186
ILA 178
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 293
initialization vector (IV) 301
Inside Global Address, see IGA
Inside Local Address, see ILA
interface group 191
Internet
wizard setup 31
Internet access 18
wizard setup 31
Internet Protocol version 6 68
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
Intra LAN Multicast 188
IP address 126, 139
ping 274
private 139
WAN 67
IP Address Assignment 91
IP alias
NAT applications 180
IPv6 68, 306
addressing 68, 93, 306
EUI-64 308
global address 307
interface ID 308
link-local address 306
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 306
ping 306
prefix 68, 93, 306
prefix delegation 70
prefix length 68, 93, 306
unspecified address 307
iTunes server 200
L
LAN 125
and USB printer 201
client list 131
DHCP 126, 138
DNS 126, 138
IP address 126, 127, 139
MAC address 131
status 64
subnet mask 126, 127, 139
LAN to LAN multicast 188
LAND attack 208
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 257
LBR 273
limitations
wireless LAN 115
WPS 123
link trace 273
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
login 23
passwords 23
logs 232, 235, 243, 249, 264
Loop Back Response, see LBR
loopback 273
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
328
LTM 273
LTR 273
M
MA 273
MAC address 103, 131
filter 102, 114
MAC authentication 102
Mac filter 216
Maintenance Association, see MA
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
Management Information Base (MIB) 258
managing the device
good habits 17
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 90
MBSSID 116
MD 273
media server 200
activation 201
iTunes server 200
MEP 273
MLD 186
MLDv1 186
MLDv2 186
MSCHAP 74
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 91
multicast 92
Multicast Listener Discovery, see MLD
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
multiplexing 89
LLC-based 90
VC-based 89
multiprotocol encapsulation 89
N
NAT 165, 166, 167, 178
applications 179
IP alias 180
example 179
global 178
IGA 178
ILA 178
inside 178
local 178
outside 178
port forwarding 166
port number 180
services 180
SIP ALG 174
activation 175
NAT example 181
Network Address Translation, see NAT
Network Map 62
network map 26
NNTP 180
P
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 301, 303
PAP 74
passwords 23
PBC 118
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 90
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 161
PHB 161
PIN, WPS 118
example 120
Ping of Death 208
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP
POP3 180
port forwarding 166
ports 20
Power Mgmt 203
Power Mgmt Add 206
PPPoE 89
Benefits 89
PPTP 180
preamble 110, 113
preamble mode 117
prefix delegation 70
Printer Server 201
printer sharing 54
and LAN 201
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
329
configuration 54
requirements 201
private IP address 139
PSK 301
push button 22
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
push button, WPS 118
Q
QoS 148, 161
marking 149
setup 148
tagging 149
versus CoS 148
Quality of Service, see QoS
R
RADIUS 298
message types 298
messages 298
shared secret key 298
RADIUS server 114
remote management
TR-069 255
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 255
reset 21, 271
restart 272
restoring configuration 271
RFC 1058. See RIP.
RFC 1389. See RIP.
RFC 1483 89
RFC 3164 232
RIP 146
router features 18
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
RPPCs 255
RTS (Request To Send) 296
threshold 295, 296
RTS threshold 109, 113
S
security
wireless LAN 113
Security Log 234
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
service access control 253
Service Set 96, 101
Services 180
setup
firewalls 208
static route 87, 142, 144, 183
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM
SIP ALG 174
activation 175
SMTP 180
SNMP 180, 258, 259
agents 258
Get 259
GetNext 259
Manager 258
managers 258
MIB 258
network components 258
Set 259
Trap 259
versions 258
SNMP trap 180
SPI 208
srTCM 163
SSID 114
activation 100
MBSSID 116
static route 141, 146, 262
configuration 87, 142, 144, 183
example 141
static VLAN
status 62
firmware version 63
LAN 64
WAN 64
status indicators 20
subnet mask 126, 139
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 90
SYN attack
208
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
330
syslog
protocol 232
severity levels 232
system
firmware 267
version 63
passwords 23
reset 21
status 62
LAN 64
WAN 64
time 260
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCI
The 67
thresholds
data fragment 109, 113
RTS/CTS 109, 113
time 260
TPID 92
TR-064 257
TR-069 255
ACS setup 255
authentication 256
traffic shaping 90
trTCM 163
Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
U
unicast 92
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 267
UPnP 132
cautions 127
NAT traversal 126
USB features 19
V
Vendor ID 136, 137
VID
Virtual Circuit (VC) 89
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLAN 91
Introduction 91
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 92
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 92
W
WAN
status 64
Wide Area Network, see WAN 66
warranty 324
note 324
WDS 106, 117
compatibility 106
example 117
web configurator 23
login 23
passwords 23
WEP 115
WEP Encryption 98, 99
WEP encryption 97
WEP key 97
Wi-Fi Protected Access 300
wireless client WPA supplicants 302
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN 94, 111
authentication 113, 114
BSS 116
example 116
channel 112
encryption 115
example 112
fragmentation threshold 109, 113
limitations 115
MAC address filter 102, 114
Index
VMG1312-B Series User’s Guide
331
MBSSID 116
preamble 110, 113
RADIUS server 114
RTS/CTS threshold 109, 113
security 113
SSID 114
activation 100
WDS 106, 117
compatibility 106
example 117
WEP 115
WPA 115
WPA-PSK 115
WPS 117, 120
example 121
limitations 123
PIN 118
push button 22, 118
wireless security 297
Wireless tutorial 37
wizard setup
Internet 31
WLAN
interference 295
security parameters 304
WPA 115, 300
key caching 302
pre-authentication 302
user authentication 301
vs WPA-PSK 301
wireless client supplicant 302
with RADIUS application example 302
WPA2 300
user authentication 301
vs WPA2-PSK 301
wireless client supplicant 302
with RADIUS application example 302
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 301
WPA2-PSK 301
application example 303
WPA-PSK 115, 301
application example 303
WPS 117, 120
example
121
limitations 123
PIN 118
example 120
push button 22, 118
… 316 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for ZyXEL VMG1312-B series at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of ZyXEL VMG1312-B series in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 7,47 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of ZyXEL VMG1312-B series

ZyXEL VMG1312-B series Quick start guide - German - 14 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info